[Pkg-octave-commit] [octave] 01/03: Fix FTBFS with texinfo 6.
Sébastien Villemot
sebastien at debian.org
Sat Jul 18 12:43:14 UTC 2015
This is an automated email from the git hooks/post-receive script.
sebastien pushed a commit to branch master
in repository octave.
commit 78b0ec431a6e390649a2e394037d3243272c12e7
Author: Sébastien Villemot <sebastien at debian.org>
Date: Sat Jul 18 13:57:27 2015 +0200
Fix FTBFS with texinfo 6.
- Add texlive-fonts-recommended to build-depends (needed for texinfo 6)
- Add debian/patches/dont-use-included-texinfo-texmfcnf.patch and
xbackslash-texinfo.patch (Patches thanks to Norbert Preining and
Mike Miller)
Closes: #790533
Git-Dch: Full
---
debian/control | 1 +
.../dont-use-included-texinfo-texmfcnf.patch | 9071 ++++++++++++++++++++
debian/patches/series | 2 +
debian/patches/xbackslash-texinfo.patch | 36 +
4 files changed, 9110 insertions(+)
diff --git a/debian/control b/debian/control
index 909c1bc..0f58629 100644
--- a/debian/control
+++ b/debian/control
@@ -48,6 +48,7 @@ Build-Depends: automake,
pstoedit,
texinfo,
texlive-generic-recommended,
+ texlive-fonts-recommended,
texlive-latex-base,
transfig,
unzip,
diff --git a/debian/patches/dont-use-included-texinfo-texmfcnf.patch b/debian/patches/dont-use-included-texinfo-texmfcnf.patch
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f469d3b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/patches/dont-use-included-texinfo-texmfcnf.patch
@@ -0,0 +1,9071 @@
+Description: Use texinfo.tex from gnulib instead of manually imported version
+Origin: upstream, http://hg.savannah.gnu.org/hgweb/octave/rev/45d7be391982
+Bug-Debian: https://bugs.debian.org/cgi-bin/bugreport.cgi?bug=790533
+Last-Update: 2015-07-18
+---
+This patch header follows DEP-3: http://dep.debian.net/deps/dep3/
+diff -r 2ec049e50ed8 -r 45d7be391982 doc/Makefile.am
+--- a/doc/Makefile.am Thu Jul 09 21:44:09 2015 -0400
++++ b/doc/Makefile.am Thu Jul 09 21:45:26 2015 -0400
+@@ -26,7 +26,6 @@
+
+ EXTRA_DIST = \
+ Makefile.am \
+- texinfo.tex \
+ texmf.cnf
+
+ SUBDIRS = doxyhtml interpreter liboctave refcard
+diff -r 2ec049e50ed8 -r 45d7be391982 doc/interpreter/Makefile.am
+--- a/doc/interpreter/Makefile.am Thu Jul 09 21:44:09 2015 -0400
++++ b/doc/interpreter/Makefile.am Thu Jul 09 21:45:26 2015 -0400
+@@ -20,8 +20,6 @@
+
+ include $(top_srcdir)/build-aux/common.mk
+
+-TEXINFO_TEX = ../texinfo.tex
+-
+ ## Leading PATH_SEPARATOR required due to weak parsing by dvips (12/04/09)
+ TEXINPUTS := "$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$(srcdir)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)$(TEXINPUTS)$(PATH_SEPARATOR)"
+ export TEXINPUTS
+diff -r 2ec049e50ed8 -r 45d7be391982 doc/liboctave/Makefile.am
+--- a/doc/liboctave/Makefile.am Thu Jul 09 21:44:09 2015 -0400
++++ b/doc/liboctave/Makefile.am Thu Jul 09 21:45:26 2015 -0400
+@@ -20,8 +20,6 @@
+
+ include $(top_srcdir)/build-aux/common.mk
+
+-TEXINFO_TEX = ../texinfo.tex
+-
+ info_TEXINFOS = liboctave.texi
+
+ liboctave_TEXINFOS = \
+diff -r 2ec049e50ed8 -r 45d7be391982 doc/texinfo.tex
+--- a/doc/texinfo.tex Thu Jul 09 21:44:09 2015 -0400
++++ /dev/null Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970 +0000
+@@ -1,9026 +0,0 @@
+-% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
+-%
+-% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
+-\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
+-%
+-\def\texinfoversion{2009-04-06.11}
+-%
+-% Copyright (C) 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
+-% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
+-% 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+-%
+-% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
+-% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
+-% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
+-% License, or (at your option) any later version.
+-%
+-% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
+-% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
+-% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+-% General Public License for more details.
+-%
+-% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+-% along with this program. If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+-%
+-% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
+-% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
+-% restriction. (This has been our intent since Texinfo was invented.)
+-%
+-% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
+-% reports; you can get the latest version from:
+-% http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page), or
+-% ftp://tug.org/tex/texinfo.tex
+-% (and all CTAN mirrors, see http://www.ctan.org).
+-% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
+-% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
+-%
+-% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo at gnu.org. Please include including a
+-% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
+-% problem. Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
+-%
+-% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
+-% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution. For a simple
+-% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
+-% tex foo.texi
+-% texindex foo.??
+-% tex foo.texi
+-% tex foo.texi
+-% dvips foo.dvi -o # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
+-% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
+-% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
+-% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
+-%
+-% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
+-% extent. You can get the existing language-specific files from the
+-% full Texinfo distribution.
+-%
+-% The GNU Texinfo home page is http://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
+-
+-
+-\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
+-
+-% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
+-% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
+-% they might have appeared in the input file name.
+-\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
+- \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
+-
+-
+-\chardef\other=12
+-
+-% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
+-% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
+-\let\+ = \relax
+-
+-% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
+-\let\ptexb=\b
+-\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
+-\let\ptexc=\c
+-\let\ptexcomma=\,
+-\let\ptexdot=\.
+-\let\ptexdots=\dots
+-\let\ptexend=\end
+-\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
+-\let\ptexexclam=\!
+-\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
+-\let\ptexgtr=>
+-\let\ptexhat=^
+-\let\ptexi=\i
+-\let\ptexindent=\indent
+-\let\ptexinsert=\insert
+-\let\ptexlbrace=\{
+-\let\ptexless=<
+-\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
+-\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
+-\let\ptexplus=+
+-\let\ptexrbrace=\}
+-\let\ptexslash=\/
+-\let\ptexstar=\*
+-\let\ptext=\t
+-\let\ptextop=\top
+-
+-% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
+-% starts a new line in the output.
+-\newlinechar = `^^J
+-
+-% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
+-% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+-%
+-\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
+- \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
+-\else
+- \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
+-\fi
+-
+-% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
+-\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordfile\undefined \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordin\undefined \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordof\undefined \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordon\undefined \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordpage\undefined \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordsection\undefined \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordSection\undefined \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordsee\undefined \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordSee\undefined \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
+-%
+-\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
+-%
+-\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
+-\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
+-
+-% Since the category of space is not known, we have to be careful.
+-\chardef\spacecat = 10
+-\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =\spacecat}
+-
+-% sometimes characters are active, so we need control sequences.
+-\chardef\colonChar = `\:
+-\chardef\commaChar = `\,
+-\chardef\dashChar = `\-
+-\chardef\dotChar = `\.
+-\chardef\exclamChar= `\!
+-\chardef\lquoteChar= `\`
+-\chardef\questChar = `\?
+-\chardef\rquoteChar= `\'
+-\chardef\semiChar = `\;
+-\chardef\underChar = `\_
+-
+-% Ignore a token.
+-%
+-\def\gobble#1{}
+-
+-% The following is used inside several \edef's.
+-\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+-
+-% Hyphenation fixes.
+-\hyphenation{
+- Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
+- ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
+- data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
+- man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
+- par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
+- spell-ing spell-ings
+- stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
+- wide-spread wrap-around
+-}
+-
+-% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
+-\newdimen\bindingoffset
+-\newdimen\normaloffset
+-\newdimen\pagewidth \newdimen\pageheight
+-
+-% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+-% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+-% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+-%
+-\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt}
+-
+-% @| inserts a changebar to the left of the current line. It should
+-% surround any changed text. This approach does *not* work if the
+-% change spans more than two lines of output. To handle that, we would
+-% have adopt a much more difficult approach (putting marks into the main
+-% vertical list for the beginning and end of each change).
+-%
+-\def\|{%
+- % \vadjust can only be used in horizontal mode.
+- \leavevmode
+- %
+- % Append this vertical mode material after the current line in the output.
+- \vadjust{%
+- % We want to insert a rule with the height and depth of the current
+- % leading; that is exactly what \strutbox is supposed to record.
+- \vskip-\baselineskip
+- %
+- % \vadjust-items are inserted at the left edge of the type. So
+- % the \llap here moves out into the left-hand margin.
+- \llap{%
+- %
+- % For a thicker or thinner bar, change the `1pt'.
+- \vrule height\baselineskip width1pt
+- %
+- % This is the space between the bar and the text.
+- \hskip 12pt
+- }%
+- }%
+-}
+-
+-% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
+-% and nothing on the terminal. We don't just call \tracingall here,
+-% since that produces some useless output on the terminal. We also make
+-% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
+-% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
+-%
+-\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
+-\def\loggingall{%
+- \tracingstats2
+- \tracingpages1
+- \tracinglostchars2 % 2 gives us more in etex
+- \tracingparagraphs1
+- \tracingoutput1
+- \tracingmacros2
+- \tracingrestores1
+- \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
+- \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined\else % etex gives us more logging
+- \tracingscantokens1
+- \tracingifs1
+- \tracinggroups1
+- \tracingnesting2
+- \tracingassigns1
+- \fi
+- \tracingcommands3 % 3 gives us more in etex
+- \errorcontextlines16
+-}%
+-
+-% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions. If the last thing
+-% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
+-%
+-\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
+- \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
+-\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
+- \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
+-\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
+- \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
+-
+-% For @cropmarks command.
+-% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
+-%
+-\newif\ifcropmarks
+-\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
+-%
+-% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
+-% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
+-%
+-\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
+-\newdimen\cornerlong \cornerlong=1pc
+-\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
+-\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
+-
+-% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
+-% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
+-% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
+-%
+-% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
+-% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
+-%
+-% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
+-% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
+-% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page. The solution is
+-% described on page 260 of The TeXbook. It involves outputting two
+-% marks for the sectioning macros, one before the section break, and
+-% one after. I won't pretend I can describe this better than DEK...
+-\def\domark{%
+- \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
+- \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
+- \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
+- \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
+- \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
+- \mark{%
+- \the\toks0 \the\toks2
+- \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6
+- \noexpand\else \the\toks8
+- }%
+-}
+-% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
+-% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
+-% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
+-% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
+-% first @chapter.
+-\def\gettopheadingmarks{%
+- \ifcase0\topmark\fi
+- \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
+-}
+-\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
+-\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
+-
+-% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
+-\def\lastchapterdefs{}
+-\def\lastsectiondefs{}
+-\def\prevchapterdefs{}
+-\def\prevsectiondefs{}
+-\def\lastcolordefs{}
+-
+-% Main output routine.
+-\chardef\PAGE = 255
+-\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
+-
+-\newbox\headlinebox
+-\newbox\footlinebox
+-
+-% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument. Note that \pagecontents
+-% does insertions, but you have to call it yourself.
+-\def\onepageout#1{%
+- \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
+- %
+- \ifodd\pageno \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
+- \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
+- %
+- % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
+- % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
+- \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
+- \setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makeheadline}%
+- \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
+- \setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\let\hsize=\pagewidth \makefootline}%
+- %
+- {%
+- % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
+- % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
+- % before the \shipout runs.
+- %
+- \indexdummies % don't expand commands in the output.
+- \normalturnoffactive % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
+- % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
+- % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
+- % \entry{{\tt \indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
+- % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
+- % it needs to be
+- % {\code {{\tt \backslashcurfont }acronym}
+- \shipout\vbox{%
+- % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
+- \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
+- %
+- \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
+- \hsize = \outerhsize
+- \vskip-\topandbottommargin
+- \vtop to0pt{%
+- \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
+- \nointerlineskip
+- \line{%
+- \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
+- \hfill
+- \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
+- }%
+- \vss}%
+- \vskip\topandbottommargin
+- \line\bgroup
+- \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
+- \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
+- \vbox\bgroup
+- \fi
+- %
+- \unvbox\headlinebox
+- \pagebody{#1}%
+- \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
+- % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
+- % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
+- % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
+- \vskip 24pt
+- \unvbox\footlinebox
+- \fi
+- %
+- \ifcropmarks
+- \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
+- \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
+- \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
+- \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
+- \vbox to0pt{\vss
+- \line{%
+- \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+- \hfill
+- \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+- }%
+- \nointerlineskip
+- \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
+- }%
+- \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
+- \fi
+- }% end of \shipout\vbox
+- }% end of group with \indexdummies
+- \advancepageno
+- \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
+-}
+-
+-\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
+-
+-\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\pageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
+-{\catcode`\@ =11
+-\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
+-% marginal hacks, juha at viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
+-\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
+- \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
+-\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
+-\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
+-\ifr at ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
+-}
+-
+-% Here are the rules for the cropmarks. Note that they are
+-% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
+-% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
+-%
+-\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
+-\def\nstop{\vbox
+- {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
+-\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
+-\def\nsbot{\vbox
+- {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
+-
+-% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1. The argument is the rest of
+-% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment). #1 should be a
+-% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
+-%
+-\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
+-\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
+- \def\argtorun{#2}%
+- \begingroup
+- \obeylines
+- \spaceisspace
+- #1%
+- \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
+-}
+-
+-{\obeylines %
+- \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
+- \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
+- \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
+- }%
+-}
+-
+-% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.
+-\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
+-\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
+-
+-% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
+-%
+-% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
+-% @end itemize @c foo
+-% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
+-% by \finishparsearg.
+-%
+-\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
+-\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
+-\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
+- \def\temp{#3}%
+- \ifx\temp\empty
+- % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
+- \let\temp\finishparsearg
+- \else
+- \let\temp\argcheckspaces
+- \fi
+- % Put the space token in:
+- \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
+-}
+-
+-% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
+-% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
+-% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
+-% just before passing the control to \argtorun.
+-% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
+-% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
+-% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
+-%
+-% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
+-%
+-\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
+-
+-% \parseargdef\foo{...}
+-% is roughly equivalent to
+-% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
+-% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
+-%
+-% Actually, I use \csname\string\foo\endcsname, ie. \\foo, as it is my
+-% favourite TeX trick. --kasal, 16nov03
+-
+-\def\parseargdef#1{%
+- \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
+-}
+-\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
+- \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
+- \def#1##1%
+-}
+-
+-% Several utility definitions with active space:
+-{
+- \obeyspaces
+- \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
+-
+- % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
+- % space in the output. Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
+- % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
+- % should produce a line of output anyway.
+- %
+- \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
+-
+- % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
+- % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
+- % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
+- \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
+-}
+-
+-
+-\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
+-
+-% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex. It's used like this:
+-%
+-% \envdef\foo{...}
+-% \def\Efoo{...}
+-%
+-% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
+-% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo. \envdef also
+-% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
+-% whether the environment name matches. The \checkenv macro can also be
+-% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
+-%
+-% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
+-% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group. (The
+-% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
+-% special case.)
+-
+-
+-% At run-time, environments start with this:
+-\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
+-% initialize
+-\let\thisenv\empty
+-
+-% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
+-\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
+-\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
+-
+-% Check whether we're in the right environment:
+-\def\checkenv#1{%
+- \def\temp{#1}%
+- \ifx\thisenv\temp
+- \else
+- \badenverr
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-% Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
+-\def\badenverr{%
+- \errhelp = \EMsimple
+- \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
+- not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
+-}
+-\def\inenvironment#1{%
+- \ifx#1\empty
+- out of any environment%
+- \else
+- in environment \expandafter\string#1%
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
+-% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
+-%
+-\parseargdef\end{%
+- \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
+- \else
+- % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal, but... --kasal, 06nov03
+- \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
+- \csname E#1\endcsname
+- \endgroup
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
+-
+-
+-%% Simple single-character @ commands
+-
+-% @@ prints an @
+-% Kludge this until the fonts are right (grr).
+-\def\@{{\tt\char64}}
+-
+-% This is turned off because it was never documented
+-% and you can use @w{...} around a quote to suppress ligatures.
+-%% Define @` and @' to be the same as ` and '
+-%% but suppressing ligatures.
+-%\def\`{{`}}
+-%\def\'{{'}}
+-
+-% Used to generate quoted braces.
+-\def\mylbrace {{\tt\char123}}
+-\def\myrbrace {{\tt\char125}}
+-\let\{=\mylbrace
+-\let\}=\myrbrace
+-\begingroup
+- % Definitions to produce \{ and \} commands for indices,
+- % and @{ and @} for the aux/toc files.
+- \catcode`\{ = \other \catcode`\} = \other
+- \catcode`\[ = 1 \catcode`\] = 2
+- \catcode`\! = 0 \catcode`\\ = \other
+- !gdef!lbracecmd[\{]%
+- !gdef!rbracecmd[\}]%
+- !gdef!lbraceatcmd[@{]%
+- !gdef!rbraceatcmd[@}]%
+-!endgroup
+-
+-% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
+-\let\comma = ,
+-
+-% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
+-% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
+-\let\, = \c
+-\let\dotaccent = \.
+-\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
+-\let\tieaccent = \t
+-\let\ubaraccent = \b
+-\let\udotaccent = \d
+-
+-% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
+-% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
+-\def\questiondown{?`}
+-\def\exclamdown{!`}
+-\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{a}}}
+-\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize \underbar{o}}}
+-
+-% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
+-\def\imacro{i}
+-\def\jmacro{j}
+-\def\dotless#1{%
+- \def\temp{#1}%
+- \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
+- \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
+- \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
+- \fi\fi
+-}
+-
+-% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
+-% period following counts as ending a sentence. (Idea found in latex.)
+-%
+-\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
+-
+-% @LaTeX{} logo. Not quite the same results as the definition in
+-% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
+-% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
+-% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
+-% \scriptscriptstyle).
+-%
+-\def\LaTeX{%
+- L\kern-.36em
+- {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
+- \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize A}\vss}}%
+- \kern-.15em
+- \TeX
+-}
+-
+-% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
+-% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
+-% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
+-% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
+-% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
+-{\catcode`@ = 11
+- % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
+- % if the definition is written into an index file.
+- \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
+- \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
+-}
+-
+-% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
+-\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
+-
+-% @* forces a line break.
+-\def\*{\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
+-
+-% @/ allows a line break.
+-\let\/=\allowbreak
+-
+-% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
+-\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
+-
+-% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
+-\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
+-
+-% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
+-\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
+-
+-% @frenchspacing on|off says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
+-%
+-\def\onword{on}
+-\def\offword{off}
+-%
+-\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
+- \def\temp{#1}%
+- \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
+- \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
+- \else
+- \errhelp = \EMsimple
+- \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on/off}%
+- \fi\fi
+-}
+-
+-% @w prevents a word break. Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
+-% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
+-% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
+-\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
+-
+-% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
+-% it in a TeX vbox. We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
+-% to keep its height that of a normal line. According to the rules for
+-% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
+-% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0). If that height is large,
+-% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
+-% the text is small, which looks bad.
+-%
+-% Another complication is that the group might be very large. This can
+-% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
+-% does not have much material. In this case, it's better to add an
+-% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom. The
+-% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
+-% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
+-%
+-\newbox\groupbox
+-\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
+-%
+-\envdef\group{%
+- \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
+- \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
+- \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
+- \fi
+- \startsavinginserts
+- %
+- \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
+- % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
+- % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
+- % end-of-line in the output. We don't want the end-of-line after
+- % the `@group' to put extra space in the output. Since @group
+- % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
+- % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
+- \comment
+-}
+-%
+-% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
+-% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
+-% \lineskip glue after it. Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
+-% above. But it's pretty close.
+-\def\Egroup{%
+- % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
+- % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
+- \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
+- \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
+- \egroup % End the \vtop.
+- % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
+- \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
+- % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
+- \dimen2 = \pageheight \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
+- % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
+- % group, force a page break.
+- \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
+- \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\pageheight
+- \page
+- \fi
+- \fi
+- \box\groupbox
+- \prevdepth = \dimen1
+- \checkinserts
+-}
+-%
+-% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
+-% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
+-%
+-\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
+-group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
+-where each line of input produces a line of output.}
+-
+-% @need space-in-mils
+-% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
+-
+-\newdimen\mil \mil=0.001in
+-
+-% Old definition--didn't work.
+-%\parseargdef\need{\par %
+-%% This method tries to make TeX break the page naturally
+-%% if the depth of the box does not fit.
+-%{\baselineskip=0pt%
+-%\vtop to #1\mil{\vfil}\kern -#1\mil\nobreak
+-%\prevdepth=-1000pt
+-%}}
+-
+-\parseargdef\need{%
+- % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
+- % paragraph.
+- \par
+- %
+- % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
+- \dimen0 = #1\mil
+- \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
+- \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
+- \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
+- %
+- % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
+- % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
+- % And a page break here is fine.
+- \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
+- %
+- % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
+- % main vertical list is 10000 or more. But in order to see if the
+- % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
+- % page breaks. On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
+- % page after the empty box. So we use a penalty of 9999.
+- %
+- % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
+- % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
+- % sight. (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
+- % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
+- % good page breaking, for example.) However, I could not construct an
+- % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
+- % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
+- \penalty9999
+- %
+- % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
+- \kern -#1\mil
+- %
+- % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
+- \nobreak
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-% @br forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
+-
+-\let\br = \par
+-
+-% @page forces the start of a new page.
+-%
+-\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
+-
+-% @exdent text....
+-% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
+-
+-% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
+-% That's how much \exdent should take out.
+-\newskip\exdentamount
+-
+-% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
+-\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
+-
+-% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
+-\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
+- \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
+-
+-% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
+-% paragraph. For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
+-% class. WHICH is `l' or `r'.
+-%
+-\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
+-\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
+-%
+-\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
+- \nobreak
+- \kern-\strutdepth
+- \vtop to \strutdepth{%
+- \baselineskip=\strutdepth
+- \vss
+- % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
+- % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
+- \ifx#1l%
+- \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
+- \else
+- \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
+- \fi
+- \null
+- }%
+-}}
+-\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
+-\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
+-%
+-% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
+-% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
+-% else use TEXT for both).
+-%
+-\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
+-\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
+- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+- \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+- \def\lefttext{#1}% have both texts
+- \def\righttext{#2}%
+- \else
+- \def\lefttext{#1}% have only one text
+- \def\righttext{#1}%
+- \fi
+- %
+- \ifodd\pageno
+- \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
+- \else
+- \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
+- \fi
+- \temp
+-}
+-
+-% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
+-%
+-\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
+-\def\includezzz#1{%
+- \pushthisfilestack
+- \def\thisfile{#1}%
+- {%
+- \makevalueexpandable % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
+- \turnoffactive % and allow special characters in the expansion
+- \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
+- \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
+- %
+- % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
+- % definitions, etc.
+- \expandafter
+- }\temp
+- \popthisfilestack
+-}
+-\def\filenamecatcodes{%
+- \catcode`\\=\other
+- \catcode`~=\other
+- \catcode`^=\other
+- \catcode`_=\other
+- \catcode`|=\other
+- \catcode`<=\other
+- \catcode`>=\other
+- \catcode`+=\other
+- \catcode`-=\other
+-}
+-
+-\def\pushthisfilestack{%
+- \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
+-}
+-\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
+- \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
+-}
+-\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
+- \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
+-}
+-
+-\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
+-\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
+- the stack of filenames is empty.}}
+-
+-\def\thisfile{}
+-
+-% @center line
+-% outputs that line, centered.
+-%
+-\parseargdef\center{%
+- \ifhmode
+- \let\next\centerH
+- \else
+- \let\next\centerV
+- \fi
+- \next{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
+-}
+-\def\centerH#1{%
+- {%
+- \hfil\break
+- \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
+- \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+- \line{#1}%
+- \break
+- }%
+-}
+-\def\centerV#1{\line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}}
+-
+-% @sp n outputs n lines of vertical space
+-
+-\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
+-
+-% @comment ...line which is ignored...
+-% @c is the same as @comment
+-% @ignore ... @end ignore is another way to write a comment
+-
+-\def\comment{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\other%
+-\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
+-\commentxxx}
+-{\catcode`\^^M=\other \gdef\commentxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
+-
+-\let\c=\comment
+-
+-% @paragraphindent NCHARS
+-% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
+-% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
+-% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
+-%
+-\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
+-\def\noneword{none}
+-%
+-\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
+- \def\temp{#1}%
+- \ifx\temp\asisword
+- \else
+- \ifx\temp\noneword
+- \defaultparindent = 0pt
+- \else
+- \defaultparindent = #1em
+- \fi
+- \fi
+- \parindent = \defaultparindent
+-}
+-
+-% @exampleindent NCHARS
+-% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
+-% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
+-% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
+-\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
+- \def\temp{#1}%
+- \ifx\temp\asisword
+- \else
+- \ifx\temp\noneword
+- \lispnarrowing = 0pt
+- \else
+- \lispnarrowing = #1em
+- \fi
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-% @firstparagraphindent WORD
+-% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
+-% after a section heading. If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
+-% paragraphs.
+-%
+-% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
+-% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
+-% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
+-% By default, we suppress indentation.
+-%
+-\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
+-\def\insertword{insert}
+-%
+-\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
+- \def\temp{#1}%
+- \ifx\temp\noneword
+- \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
+- \else\ifx\temp\insertword
+- \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
+- \else
+- \errhelp = \EMsimple
+- \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
+- \fi\fi
+-}
+-
+-% Here is how we actually suppress indentation. Redefine \everypar to
+-% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
+-%
+-% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
+-% paragraph.
+-%
+-\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
+- \gdef\indent{%
+- \restorefirstparagraphindent
+- \indent
+- }%
+- \gdef\noindent{%
+- \restorefirstparagraphindent
+- \noindent
+- }%
+- \global\everypar = {%
+- \kern -\parindent
+- \restorefirstparagraphindent
+- }%
+-}
+-
+-\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
+- \global \let \indent = \ptexindent
+- \global \let \noindent = \ptexnoindent
+- \global \everypar = {}%
+-}
+-
+-
+-% @asis just yields its argument. Used with @table, for example.
+-%
+-\def\asis#1{#1}
+-
+-% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
+-%
+-% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
+-% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}. So make
+-% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
+-% which is what @var uses.
+-{
+- \catcode`\_ = \active
+- \gdef\mathunderscore{%
+- \catcode`\_=\active
+- \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
+- }
+-}
+-% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a \ character.
+-% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (why?), but
+-% this is not advertised and we don't care. Texinfo does not
+-% otherwise define @\.
+-%
+-% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
+-\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
+-%
+-\def\math{%
+- \tex
+- \mathunderscore
+- \let\\ = \mathbackslash
+- \mathactive
+- % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
+- \let\"=\ddot
+- \let\'=\acute
+- \let\==\bar
+- \let\^=\hat
+- \let\`=\grave
+- \let\u=\breve
+- \let\v=\check
+- \let\~=\tilde
+- \let\dotaccent=\dot
+- $\finishmath
+-}
+-\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup} % Close the group opened by \tex.
+-
+-% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
+-% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
+-% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
+-%
+-{
+- \catcode`^ = \active
+- \catcode`< = \active
+- \catcode`> = \active
+- \catcode`+ = \active
+- \gdef\mathactive{%
+- \let^ = \ptexhat
+- \let< = \ptexless
+- \let> = \ptexgtr
+- \let+ = \ptexplus
+- }
+-}
+-
+-% Some math mode symbols.
+-\def\bullet{$\ptexbullet$}
+-\def\geq{\ifmmode \ge\else $\ge$\fi}
+-\def\leq{\ifmmode \le\else $\le$\fi}
+-\def\minus{\ifmmode -\else $-$\fi}
+-
+-% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
+-% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
+-% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
+-% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em. So do
+-% whichever is larger.
+-%
+-\def\dots{%
+- \leavevmode
+- \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
+- \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
+- \dimen0 = \wd0
+- \else
+- \dimen0 = 1.5em
+- \fi
+- \hbox to \dimen0{%
+- \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
+- .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
+- .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
+- .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
+- }%
+-}
+-
+-% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
+-%
+-\def\enddots{%
+- \dots
+- \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
+-}
+-
+-% @comma{} is so commas can be inserted into text without messing up
+-% Texinfo's parsing.
+-%
+-\let\comma = ,
+-
+-% @refill is a no-op.
+-\let\refill=\relax
+-
+-% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
+-% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
+-% This is done with @novalidate (before @setfilename).
+-%
+-\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
+-\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
+-
+-% @setfilename is done at the beginning of every texinfo file.
+-% So open here the files we need to have open while reading the input.
+-% This makes it possible to make a .fmt file for texinfo.
+-\def\setfilename{%
+- \fixbackslash % Turn off hack to swallow `\input texinfo'.
+- \iflinks
+- \tryauxfile
+- % Open the new aux file. TeX will close it automatically at exit.
+- \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
+- \fi % \openindices needs to do some work in any case.
+- \openindices
+- \let\setfilename=\comment % Ignore extra @setfilename cmds.
+- %
+- % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
+- % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.
+- \openin 1 texinfo.cnf
+- \ifeof 1 \else \input texinfo.cnf \fi
+- \closein 1
+- %
+- \comment % Ignore the actual filename.
+-}
+-
+-% Called from \setfilename.
+-%
+-\def\openindices{%
+- \newindex{cp}%
+- \newcodeindex{fn}%
+- \newcodeindex{vr}%
+- \newcodeindex{tp}%
+- \newcodeindex{ky}%
+- \newcodeindex{pg}%
+-}
+-
+-% @bye.
+-\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
+-
+-
+-\message{pdf,}
+-% adobe `portable' document format
+-\newcount\tempnum
+-\newcount\lnkcount
+-\newtoks\filename
+-\newcount\filenamelength
+-\newcount\pgn
+-\newtoks\toksA
+-\newtoks\toksB
+-\newtoks\toksC
+-\newtoks\toksD
+-\newbox\boxA
+-\newcount\countA
+-\newif\ifpdf
+-\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
+-
+-% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
+-% can be set). So we test for \relax and 0 as well as \undefined,
+-% borrowed from ifpdf.sty.
+-\ifx\pdfoutput\undefined
+-\else
+- \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
+- \else
+- \ifcase\pdfoutput
+- \else
+- \pdftrue
+- \fi
+- \fi
+-\fi
+-
+-% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
+-% for display in the outlines, and in other places. Thus, we have to
+-% double any backslashes. Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
+-% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e. Not good.
+-% http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html
+-% (and related messages, the final outcome is that it is up to the TeX
+-% user to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
+-% that's what we do).
+-
+-% double active backslashes.
+-%
+-{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
+- @gdef at activebackslashdouble{%
+- @catcode`@\=@active
+- @let\=@doublebackslash}
+-}
+-
+-% To handle parens, we must adopt a different approach, since parens are
+-% not active characters. hyperref.dtx (which has the same problem as
+-% us) handles it with this amazing macro to replace tokens, with minor
+-% changes for Texinfo. It is included here under the GPL by permission
+-% from the author, Heiko Oberdiek.
+-%
+-% #1 is the tokens to replace.
+-% #2 is the replacement.
+-% #3 is the control sequence with the string.
+-%
+-\def\HyPsdSubst#1#2#3{%
+- \def\HyPsdReplace##1#1##2\END{%
+- ##1%
+- \ifx\\##2\\%
+- \else
+- #2%
+- \HyReturnAfterFi{%
+- \HyPsdReplace##2\END
+- }%
+- \fi
+- }%
+- \xdef#3{\expandafter\HyPsdReplace#3#1\END}%
+-}
+-\long\def\HyReturnAfterFi#1\fi{\fi#1}
+-
+-% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements.
+-\def\backslashparens#1{%
+- \xdef#1{#1}% redefine it as its expansion; the definition is simply
+- % \lastnode when called from \setref -> \pdfmkdest.
+- \HyPsdSubst{(}{\realbackslash(}{#1}%
+- \HyPsdSubst{)}{\realbackslash)}{#1}%
+-}
+-
+-\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
+-with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found. (.eps cannot
+-be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
+-output) for that.)}
+-
+-\ifpdf
+- %
+- % Color manipulation macros based on pdfcolor.tex.
+- \def\cmykDarkRed{0.28 1 1 0.35}
+- \def\cmykBlack{0 0 0 1}
+- %
+- \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 k}}
+- % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
+- % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
+- \def\setcolor#1{%
+- \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
+- \domark
+- \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
+- }
+- %
+- \def\maincolor{\cmykBlack}
+- \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
+- \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
+- \def\lastcolordefs{}
+- %
+- \def\makefootline{%
+- \baselineskip24pt
+- \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
+- }
+- %
+- \def\makeheadline{%
+- \vbox to 0pt{%
+- \vskip-22.5pt
+- \line{%
+- \vbox to8.5pt{}%
+- % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
+- \getcolormarks
+- % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
+- \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
+- }%
+- \vss
+- }%
+- \nointerlineskip
+- }
+- %
+- %
+- \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
+- %
+- % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
+- \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
+- \def\imagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+- \def\imageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+- %
+- % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .png, .jpg, .pdf (among
+- % others). Let's try in that order.
+- \let\pdfimgext=\empty
+- \begingroup
+- \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
+- \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
+- \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
+- \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
+- \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
+- \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
+- \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
+- \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
+- \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
+- \fi
+- \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
+- \fi
+- \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
+- \fi
+- \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
+- \fi
+- \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
+- \fi
+- \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
+- \fi
+- \closein 1
+- \endgroup
+- %
+- % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
+- % included twice. (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
+- \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
+- \immediate\pdfimage
+- \else
+- \immediate\pdfximage
+- \fi
+- \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \imagewidth \fi
+- \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \imageheight \fi
+- \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
+- #1.\pdfimgext
+- \else
+- {#1.\pdfimgext}%
+- \fi
+- \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
+- \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
+- \fi}
+- %
+- \def\pdfmkdest#1{{%
+- % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
+- % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
+- \indexnofonts
+- \turnoffactive
+- \activebackslashdouble
+- \makevalueexpandable
+- \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
+- \backslashparens\pdfdestname
+- \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
+- }}
+- %
+- % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
+- \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
+- %
+- % by default, use a color that is dark enough to print on paper as
+- % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.
+- \def\urlcolor{\cmykDarkRed}
+- \def\linkcolor{\cmykDarkRed}
+- \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
+- %
+- % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
+- % come from Petr Olsak
+- \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
+- \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
+- \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
+- \advance\tempnum by 1
+- \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
+- %
+- % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
+- % outline by the pdf viewer. #2 is the pdf expression for the number
+- % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections). #3 is the node text,
+- % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
+- % #4 is the page number
+- %
+- \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
+- % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
+- % page number. We could generate a destination for the section
+- % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
+- % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
+- \def\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
+- \ifx\pdfoutlinedest\empty
+- \def\pdfoutlinedest{#4}%
+- \else
+- % Doubled backslashes in the name.
+- {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinedest{#3}%
+- \backslashparens\pdfoutlinedest}%
+- \fi
+- %
+- % Also double the backslashes in the display string.
+- {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
+- \backslashparens\pdfoutlinetext}%
+- %
+- \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfoutlinedest}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
+- }
+- %
+- \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
+- \begingroup
+- % Thanh's hack / proper braces in bookmarks
+- \edef\mylbrace{\iftrue \string{\else}\fi}\let\{=\mylbrace
+- \edef\myrbrace{\iffalse{\else\string}\fi}\let\}=\myrbrace
+- %
+- % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
+- \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
+- \def\thischapnum{##2}%
+- \def\thissecnum{0}%
+- \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+- }%
+- \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+- \advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
+- \def\thissecnum{##2}%
+- \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+- }%
+- \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+- \advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
+- \def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
+- }%
+- \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+- \advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
+- }%
+- \def\thischapnum{0}%
+- \def\thissecnum{0}%
+- \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+- %
+- % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
+- % al. a second time, below.
+- \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
+- \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
+- \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
+- \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
+- \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
+- \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
+- \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
+- \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
+- \readdatafile{toc}%
+- %
+- % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
+- % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
+- % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
+- %
+- % We use the node names as the destinations.
+- \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
+- \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+- \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+- \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+- \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+- \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+- \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
+- \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
+- %
+- % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
+- % document fonts. Therefore we cannot use special characters,
+- % since the encoding is unknown. For example, the eogonek from
+- % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character. Info from
+- % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
+- %
+- % xx to do this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
+- % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding. Right
+- % now, I guess we'll just let the pdf reader have its way.
+- \indexnofonts
+- \setupdatafile
+- \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
+- \input \tocreadfilename
+- \endgroup
+- }
+- %
+- \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
+- \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
+- \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
+- \ifx\p\space\else\addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
+- \advance\filenamelength by 1
+- \fi
+- \fi
+- \nextsp}
+- \def\getfilename#1{\filenamelength=0\expandafter\skipspaces#1|\relax}
+- \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
+- \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
+- \else
+- \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
+- \fi
+- % make a live url in pdf output.
+- \def\pdfurl#1{%
+- \begingroup
+- % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
+- % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
+- % of @url. for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
+- % people have actually reported a problem with.
+- %
+- \normalturnoffactive
+- \def\@{@}%
+- \let\/=\empty
+- \makevalueexpandable
+- \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
+- \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+- user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
+- \endgroup}
+- \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
+- \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
+- \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
+- \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
+- \def\maketoks{%
+- \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
+- \ifx\first0\adn0
+- \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
+- \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
+- \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
+- \else
+- \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
+- \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
+- \let\next=\maketoks
+- \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
+- \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
+- \fi
+- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+- \next}
+- \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
+- {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
+- \def\pdflink#1{%
+- \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
+- \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
+- \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
+-\else
+- \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
+- \let\pdfurl = \gobble
+- \let\endlink = \relax
+- \let\setcolor = \gobble
+- \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
+- \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
+-\fi % \ifx\pdfoutput
+-
+-
+-\message{fonts,}
+-
+-% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
+-% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
+-% italics, not bold italics.
+-%
+-\def\setfontstyle#1{%
+- \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
+- \csname ten#1\endcsname % change the current font
+-}
+-
+-% Select #1 fonts with the current style.
+-%
+-\def\selectfonts#1{\csname #1fonts\endcsname \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname}
+-
+-\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
+-\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
+-\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
+-\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
+-\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
+-
+-% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
+-% So we set up a \sf.
+-\newfam\sffam
+-\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
+-\let\li = \sf % Sometimes we call it \li, not \sf.
+-
+-% We don't need math for this font style.
+-\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
+-
+-
+-% Default leading.
+-\newdimen\textleading \textleading = 13.2pt
+-
+-% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
+-% correspondingly. There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
+-% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
+-%
+-\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
+-\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
+-\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
+-%
+-% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
+-\def\baselinefactor{1}
+-%
+-\def\setleading#1{%
+- \dimen0 = #1\relax
+- \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
+- \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
+- \normalbaselines
+- \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
+- \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
+- depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
+- }%
+-}
+-
+-% PDF CMaps. See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
+-%
+-% do nothing with this by default.
+-\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
+-\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
+-\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
+-
+-% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
+-% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
+-% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
+-\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\undefined \else
+- \begingroup
+- \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
+- \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
+-%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+-%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+-%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
+-%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
+-%%Version: 1.000
+-%%EndComments
+-/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
+-12 dict begin
+-begincmap
+-/CIDSystemInfo
+-<< /Registry (TeX)
+-/Ordering (OT1)
+-/Supplement 0
+->> def
+-/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
+-/CMapType 2 def
+-1 begincodespacerange
+-<00> <7F>
+-endcodespacerange
+-8 beginbfrange
+-<00> <01> <0393>
+-<09> <0A> <03A8>
+-<23> <26> <0023>
+-<28> <3B> <0028>
+-<3F> <5B> <003F>
+-<5D> <5E> <005D>
+-<61> <7A> <0061>
+-<7B> <7C> <2013>
+-endbfrange
+-40 beginbfchar
+-<02> <0398>
+-<03> <039B>
+-<04> <039E>
+-<05> <03A0>
+-<06> <03A3>
+-<07> <03D2>
+-<08> <03A6>
+-<0B> <00660066>
+-<0C> <00660069>
+-<0D> <0066006C>
+-<0E> <006600660069>
+-<0F> <00660066006C>
+-<10> <0131>
+-<11> <0237>
+-<12> <0060>
+-<13> <00B4>
+-<14> <02C7>
+-<15> <02D8>
+-<16> <00AF>
+-<17> <02DA>
+-<18> <00B8>
+-<19> <00DF>
+-<1A> <00E6>
+-<1B> <0153>
+-<1C> <00F8>
+-<1D> <00C6>
+-<1E> <0152>
+-<1F> <00D8>
+-<21> <0021>
+-<22> <201D>
+-<27> <2019>
+-<3C> <00A1>
+-<3D> <003D>
+-<3E> <00BF>
+-<5C> <201C>
+-<5F> <02D9>
+-<60> <2018>
+-<7D> <02DD>
+-<7E> <007E>
+-<7F> <00A8>
+-endbfchar
+-endcmap
+-CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
+-end
+-end
+-%%EndResource
+-%%EOF
+- }\endgroup
+- \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
+- \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
+- }%
+-%
+-% \cmapOT1IT
+- \begingroup
+- \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
+- \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
+-%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+-%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+-%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
+-%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
+-%%Version: 1.000
+-%%EndComments
+-/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
+-12 dict begin
+-begincmap
+-/CIDSystemInfo
+-<< /Registry (TeX)
+-/Ordering (OT1IT)
+-/Supplement 0
+->> def
+-/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
+-/CMapType 2 def
+-1 begincodespacerange
+-<00> <7F>
+-endcodespacerange
+-8 beginbfrange
+-<00> <01> <0393>
+-<09> <0A> <03A8>
+-<25> <26> <0025>
+-<28> <3B> <0028>
+-<3F> <5B> <003F>
+-<5D> <5E> <005D>
+-<61> <7A> <0061>
+-<7B> <7C> <2013>
+-endbfrange
+-42 beginbfchar
+-<02> <0398>
+-<03> <039B>
+-<04> <039E>
+-<05> <03A0>
+-<06> <03A3>
+-<07> <03D2>
+-<08> <03A6>
+-<0B> <00660066>
+-<0C> <00660069>
+-<0D> <0066006C>
+-<0E> <006600660069>
+-<0F> <00660066006C>
+-<10> <0131>
+-<11> <0237>
+-<12> <0060>
+-<13> <00B4>
+-<14> <02C7>
+-<15> <02D8>
+-<16> <00AF>
+-<17> <02DA>
+-<18> <00B8>
+-<19> <00DF>
+-<1A> <00E6>
+-<1B> <0153>
+-<1C> <00F8>
+-<1D> <00C6>
+-<1E> <0152>
+-<1F> <00D8>
+-<21> <0021>
+-<22> <201D>
+-<23> <0023>
+-<24> <00A3>
+-<27> <2019>
+-<3C> <00A1>
+-<3D> <003D>
+-<3E> <00BF>
+-<5C> <201C>
+-<5F> <02D9>
+-<60> <2018>
+-<7D> <02DD>
+-<7E> <007E>
+-<7F> <00A8>
+-endbfchar
+-endcmap
+-CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
+-end
+-end
+-%%EndResource
+-%%EOF
+- }\endgroup
+- \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
+- \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
+- }%
+-%
+-% \cmapOT1TT
+- \begingroup
+- \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
+- \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
+-%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+-%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+-%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
+-%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
+-%%Version: 1.000
+-%%EndComments
+-/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
+-12 dict begin
+-begincmap
+-/CIDSystemInfo
+-<< /Registry (TeX)
+-/Ordering (OT1TT)
+-/Supplement 0
+->> def
+-/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
+-/CMapType 2 def
+-1 begincodespacerange
+-<00> <7F>
+-endcodespacerange
+-5 beginbfrange
+-<00> <01> <0393>
+-<09> <0A> <03A8>
+-<21> <26> <0021>
+-<28> <5F> <0028>
+-<61> <7E> <0061>
+-endbfrange
+-32 beginbfchar
+-<02> <0398>
+-<03> <039B>
+-<04> <039E>
+-<05> <03A0>
+-<06> <03A3>
+-<07> <03D2>
+-<08> <03A6>
+-<0B> <2191>
+-<0C> <2193>
+-<0D> <0027>
+-<0E> <00A1>
+-<0F> <00BF>
+-<10> <0131>
+-<11> <0237>
+-<12> <0060>
+-<13> <00B4>
+-<14> <02C7>
+-<15> <02D8>
+-<16> <00AF>
+-<17> <02DA>
+-<18> <00B8>
+-<19> <00DF>
+-<1A> <00E6>
+-<1B> <0153>
+-<1C> <00F8>
+-<1D> <00C6>
+-<1E> <0152>
+-<1F> <00D8>
+-<20> <2423>
+-<27> <2019>
+-<60> <2018>
+-<7F> <00A8>
+-endbfchar
+-endcmap
+-CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
+-end
+-end
+-%%EndResource
+-%%EOF
+- }\endgroup
+- \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
+- \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
+- }%
+-\fi\fi
+-
+-
+-% Set the font macro #1 to the font named #2, adding on the
+-% specified font prefix (normally `cm').
+-% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
+-% encoding (currently only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, pass
+-% empty to omit).
+-\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
+- \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
+- \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
+-}
+-% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
+-\let\cmap\gobble
+-% emacs-page end of cmaps
+-
+-% Use cm as the default font prefix.
+-% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
+-% before you read in texinfo.tex.
+-\ifx\fontprefix\undefined
+-\def\fontprefix{cm}
+-\fi
+-% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
+-\def\rmshape{r}
+-\def\rmbshape{bx} %where the normal face is bold
+-\def\bfshape{b}
+-\def\bxshape{bx}
+-\def\ttshape{tt}
+-\def\ttbshape{tt}
+-\def\ttslshape{sltt}
+-\def\itshape{ti}
+-\def\itbshape{bxti}
+-\def\slshape{sl}
+-\def\slbshape{bxsl}
+-\def\sfshape{ss}
+-\def\sfbshape{ss}
+-\def\scshape{csc}
+-\def\scbshape{csc}
+-
+-% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt. This is the default in
+-% Texinfo.
+-%
+-\def\definetextfontsizexi{%
+-% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
+-\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
+-\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
+-\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+-\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+-\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
+-\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+-\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+-\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+-\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
+-\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
+-\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+-\def\textecsize{1095}
+-
+-% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
+-\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+-\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+-\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
+-
+-% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
+-\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
+-\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
+-\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
+-\font\smalli=cmmi9
+-\font\smallsy=cmsy9
+-\def\smallecsize{0900}
+-
+-% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
+-\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
+-\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
+-\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
+-\font\smalleri=cmmi8
+-\font\smallersy=cmsy8
+-\def\smallerecsize{0800}
+-
+-% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
+-\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
+-\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
+-\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
+-\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
+-\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+-\let\titlebf=\titlerm
+-\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
+-\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
+-\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
+-\def\authorrm{\secrm}
+-\def\authortt{\sectt}
+-\def\titleecsize{2074}
+-
+-% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
+-\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
+-\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+-\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
+-\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
+-\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
+-\let\chapbf=\chaprm
+-\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
+-\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
+-\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
+-\def\chapecsize{1728}
+-
+-% Section fonts (14.4pt).
+-\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
+-\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+-\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
+-\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+-\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+-\let\secbf\secrm
+-\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+-\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
+-\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+-\def\sececsize{1440}
+-
+-% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
+-\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
+-\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
+-\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
+-\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
+-\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
+-\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
+-\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
+-\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
+-\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
+-\def\ssececsize{1200}
+-
+-% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (10pt).
+-\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
+-\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
+-\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
+-\font\reducedi=cmmi10
+-\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
+-\def\reducedecsize{1000}
+-
+-% reset the current fonts
+-\textfonts
+-\rm
+-} % end of 11pt text font size definitions
+-
+-
+-% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
+-% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit. This is for the GNU
+-% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual. Maybe other manuals in the
+-% future. Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
+-%
+-\def\definetextfontsizex{%
+-% Text fonts (10pt).
+-\def\textnominalsize{10pt}
+-\edef\mainmagstep{1000}
+-\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+-\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+-\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
+-\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+-\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+-\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+-\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
+-\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
+-\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+-\def\textecsize{1000}
+-
+-% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
+-\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
+-\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
+-\def\df{\let\tentt=\deftt \let\tenbf = \defbf \let\tenttsl=\defttsl \bf}
+-
+-% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
+-\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
+-\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
+-\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
+-\font\smalli=cmmi9
+-\font\smallsy=cmsy9
+-\def\smallecsize{0900}
+-
+-% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
+-\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
+-\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
+-\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
+-\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
+-\font\smalleri=cmmi8
+-\font\smallersy=cmsy8
+-\def\smallerecsize{0800}
+-
+-% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
+-\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
+-\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
+-\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
+-\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
+-\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+-\let\titlebf=\titlerm
+-\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
+-\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
+-\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
+-\def\authorrm{\secrm}
+-\def\authortt{\sectt}
+-\def\titleecsize{2074}
+-
+-% Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
+-\def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
+-\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+-\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
+-\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+-\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+-\let\chapbf\chaprm
+-\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+-\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
+-\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+-\def\chapecsize{1440}
+-
+-% Section fonts (12pt).
+-\def\secnominalsize{12pt}
+-\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
+-\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+-\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
+-\let\secbf\secrm
+-\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+-\font\seci=cmmi12
+-\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
+-\def\sececsize{1200}
+-
+-% Subsection fonts (10pt).
+-\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
+-\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
+-\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+-\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
+-\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+-\font\sseci=cmmi10
+-\font\ssecsy=cmsy10
+-\def\ssececsize{1000}
+-
+-% Reduced fonts for @acro in text (9pt).
+-\def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
+-\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
+-\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+-\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
+-\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+-\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
+-\font\reducedi=cmmi9
+-\font\reducedsy=cmsy9
+-\def\reducedecsize{0900}
+-
+-% reduce space between paragraphs
+-\divide\parskip by 2
+-
+-% reset the current fonts
+-\textfonts
+-\rm
+-} % end of 10pt text font size definitions
+-
+-
+-% We provide the user-level command
+-% @fonttextsize 10
+-% (or 11) to redefine the text font size. pt is assumed.
+-%
+-\def\xword{10}
+-\def\xiword{11}
+-%
+-\parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
+- \def\textsizearg{#1}%
+- \wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
+- %
+- % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
+- % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
+- %
+- \begingroup \globaldefs=1
+- \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
+- \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
+- \else
+- \errhelp=\EMsimple
+- \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
+- \fi\fi
+- \endgroup
+-}
+-
+-
+-% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
+-% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families. Since
+-% texinfo doesn't allow for producing subscripts and superscripts except
+-% in the main text, we don't bother to reset \scriptfont and
+-% \scriptscriptfont (which would also require loading a lot more fonts).
+-%
+-\def\resetmathfonts{%
+- \textfont0=\tenrm \textfont1=\teni \textfont2=\tensy
+- \textfont\itfam=\tenit \textfont\slfam=\tensl \textfont\bffam=\tenbf
+- \textfont\ttfam=\tentt \textfont\sffam=\tensf
+-}
+-
+-% The font-changing commands redefine the meanings of \tenSTYLE, instead
+-% of just \STYLE. We do this because \STYLE needs to also set the
+-% current \fam for math mode. Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm) commands hardwire
+-% \tenSTYLE to set the current font.
+-%
+-% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
+-% and \lllsize (three sizes lower). These relative commands are used in
+-% the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
+-%
+-% This all needs generalizing, badly.
+-%
+-\def\textfonts{%
+- \let\tenrm=\textrm \let\tenit=\textit \let\tensl=\textsl
+- \let\tenbf=\textbf \let\tentt=\texttt \let\smallcaps=\textsc
+- \let\tensf=\textsf \let\teni=\texti \let\tensy=\textsy
+- \let\tenttsl=\textttsl
+- \def\curfontsize{text}%
+- \def\lsize{reduced}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+- \resetmathfonts \setleading{\textleading}}
+-\def\titlefonts{%
+- \let\tenrm=\titlerm \let\tenit=\titleit \let\tensl=\titlesl
+- \let\tenbf=\titlebf \let\tentt=\titlett \let\smallcaps=\titlesc
+- \let\tensf=\titlesf \let\teni=\titlei \let\tensy=\titlesy
+- \let\tenttsl=\titlettsl
+- \def\curfontsize{title}%
+- \def\lsize{chap}\def\lllsize{subsec}%
+- \resetmathfonts \setleading{25pt}}
+-\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
+-\def\chapfonts{%
+- \let\tenrm=\chaprm \let\tenit=\chapit \let\tensl=\chapsl
+- \let\tenbf=\chapbf \let\tentt=\chaptt \let\smallcaps=\chapsc
+- \let\tensf=\chapsf \let\teni=\chapi \let\tensy=\chapsy
+- \let\tenttsl=\chapttsl
+- \def\curfontsize{chap}%
+- \def\lsize{sec}\def\lllsize{text}%
+- \resetmathfonts \setleading{19pt}}
+-\def\secfonts{%
+- \let\tenrm=\secrm \let\tenit=\secit \let\tensl=\secsl
+- \let\tenbf=\secbf \let\tentt=\sectt \let\smallcaps=\secsc
+- \let\tensf=\secsf \let\teni=\seci \let\tensy=\secsy
+- \let\tenttsl=\secttsl
+- \def\curfontsize{sec}%
+- \def\lsize{subsec}\def\lllsize{reduced}%
+- \resetmathfonts \setleading{16pt}}
+-\def\subsecfonts{%
+- \let\tenrm=\ssecrm \let\tenit=\ssecit \let\tensl=\ssecsl
+- \let\tenbf=\ssecbf \let\tentt=\ssectt \let\smallcaps=\ssecsc
+- \let\tensf=\ssecsf \let\teni=\sseci \let\tensy=\ssecsy
+- \let\tenttsl=\ssecttsl
+- \def\curfontsize{ssec}%
+- \def\lsize{text}\def\lllsize{small}%
+- \resetmathfonts \setleading{15pt}}
+-\let\subsubsecfonts = \subsecfonts
+-\def\reducedfonts{%
+- \let\tenrm=\reducedrm \let\tenit=\reducedit \let\tensl=\reducedsl
+- \let\tenbf=\reducedbf \let\tentt=\reducedtt \let\reducedcaps=\reducedsc
+- \let\tensf=\reducedsf \let\teni=\reducedi \let\tensy=\reducedsy
+- \let\tenttsl=\reducedttsl
+- \def\curfontsize{reduced}%
+- \def\lsize{small}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+- \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
+-\def\smallfonts{%
+- \let\tenrm=\smallrm \let\tenit=\smallit \let\tensl=\smallsl
+- \let\tenbf=\smallbf \let\tentt=\smalltt \let\smallcaps=\smallsc
+- \let\tensf=\smallsf \let\teni=\smalli \let\tensy=\smallsy
+- \let\tenttsl=\smallttsl
+- \def\curfontsize{small}%
+- \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+- \resetmathfonts \setleading{10.5pt}}
+-\def\smallerfonts{%
+- \let\tenrm=\smallerrm \let\tenit=\smallerit \let\tensl=\smallersl
+- \let\tenbf=\smallerbf \let\tentt=\smallertt \let\smallcaps=\smallersc
+- \let\tensf=\smallersf \let\teni=\smalleri \let\tensy=\smallersy
+- \let\tenttsl=\smallerttsl
+- \def\curfontsize{smaller}%
+- \def\lsize{smaller}\def\lllsize{smaller}%
+- \resetmathfonts \setleading{9.5pt}}
+-
+-% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
+-\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
+-
+-% About \smallexamplefonts. If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
+-% can fit this many characters:
+-% 8.5x11=86 smallbook=72 a4=90 a5=69
+-% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
+-% 8.5x11=90+ smallbook=80 a4=90+ a5=77
+-% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
+-% the additional smallness of 8pt. So I'm making the default 9pt.
+-%
+-% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
+-% 8.5x11=71 smallbook=60 a4=75 a5=58
+-%
+-% I wish the USA used A4 paper.
+-% --karl, 24jan03.
+-
+-
+-% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
+-%
+-\definetextfontsizexi
+-
+-% Define these so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
+-\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
+-\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
+-
+-% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
+-\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
+-
+-% Fonts for short table of contents.
+-\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1} % no cmb12
+-\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
+-\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
+-
+-%% Add scribe-like font environments, plus @l for inline lisp (usually sans
+-%% serif) and @ii for TeX italic
+-
+-% \smartitalic{ARG} outputs arg in italics, followed by an italic correction
+-% unless the following character is such as not to need one.
+-\def\smartitalicx{\ifx\next,\else\ifx\next-\else\ifx\next.\else
+- \ptexslash\fi\fi\fi}
+-\def\smartslanted#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+-\def\smartitalic#1{{\ifusingtt\ttsl\it #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+-
+-% like \smartslanted except unconditionally uses \ttsl.
+-% @var is set to this for defun arguments.
+-\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+-
+-% like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl. We never want
+-% ttsl for book titles, do we?
+-\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitalicx}
+-
+-\let\i=\smartitalic
+-\let\slanted=\smartslanted
+-\let\var=\smartslanted
+-\let\dfn=\smartslanted
+-\let\emph=\smartitalic
+-
+-% @b, explicit bold.
+-\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
+-\let\strong=\b
+-
+-% @sansserif, explicit sans.
+-\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
+-
+-% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
+-% the end of a paragraph. Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
+-% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
+-%
+-\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1 \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
+-\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
+-
+-% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
+-% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
+-% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
+-%
+-\catcode`@=11
+- \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
+- \sfcode\dotChar =\@m \sfcode\questChar=\@m \sfcode\exclamChar=\@m
+- \sfcode\colonChar=\@m \sfcode\semiChar =\@m \sfcode\commaChar =\@m
+- \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
+- }
+- \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
+- \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
+- \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
+- \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
+- }
+-\catcode`@=\other
+-\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
+-
+-\def\t#1{%
+- {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
+- \null
+-}
+-\def\samp#1{`\tclose{#1}'\null}
+-\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+-\font\keysy=cmsy9
+-\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
+- \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
+- \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
+- \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
+- \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
+- \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
+-\def\key #1{{\nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
+-% The old definition, with no lozenge:
+-%\def\key #1{{\ttsl \nohyphenation \uppercase{#1}}\null}
+-\def\ctrl #1{{\tt \rawbackslash \hat}#1}
+-
+-% @file, @option are the same as @samp.
+-\let\file=\samp
+-\let\option=\samp
+-
+-% @code is a modification of @t,
+-% which makes spaces the same size as normal in the surrounding text.
+-\def\tclose#1{%
+- {%
+- % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
+- \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
+- %
+- % Switch to typewriter.
+- \tt
+- %
+- % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
+- \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
+- %
+- % Turn off hyphenation.
+- \nohyphenation
+- %
+- \rawbackslash
+- \plainfrenchspacing
+- #1%
+- }%
+- \null
+-}
+-
+-% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
+-% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
+-% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
+-
+-% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
+-% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
+-% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
+-% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash.
+-% -- rms.
+-{
+- \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
+- \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
+- %
+- \global\def\code{\begingroup
+- \catcode\rquoteChar=\active \catcode\lquoteChar=\active
+- \let'\codequoteright \let`\codequoteleft
+- %
+- \catcode\dashChar=\active \catcode\underChar=\active
+- \ifallowcodebreaks
+- \let-\codedash
+- \let_\codeunder
+- \else
+- \let-\realdash
+- \let_\realunder
+- \fi
+- \codex
+- }
+-}
+-
+-\def\realdash{-}
+-\def\codedash{-\discretionary{}{}{}}
+-\def\codeunder{%
+- % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work. In math mode, _
+- % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
+- % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
+- % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
+- \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
+- \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
+- \else\normalunderscore \fi
+- \discretionary{}{}{}}%
+- {\_}%
+-}
+-\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
+-
+-% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
+-% each of the four underscores in __typeof__. This is undesirable in
+-% some manuals, especially if they don't have long identifiers in
+-% general. @allowcodebreaks provides a way to control this.
+-%
+-\newif\ifallowcodebreaks \allowcodebreakstrue
+-
+-\def\keywordtrue{true}
+-\def\keywordfalse{false}
+-
+-\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
+- \def\txiarg{#1}%
+- \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
+- \allowcodebreakstrue
+- \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
+- \allowcodebreaksfalse
+- \else
+- \errhelp = \EMsimple
+- \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg'}%
+- \fi\fi
+-}
+-
+-% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
+-% then @kbd has no effect.
+-
+-% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
+-% `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
+-% or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
+-\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
+- \def\txiarg{#1}%
+- \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
+- \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
+- \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
+- \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+- \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
+- \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+- \else
+- \errhelp = \EMsimple
+- \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle option `\txiarg'}%
+- \fi\fi\fi
+-}
+-\def\worddistinct{distinct}
+-\def\wordexample{example}
+-\def\wordcode{code}
+-
+-% Default is `distinct.'
+-\kbdinputstyle distinct
+-
+-\def\xkey{\key}
+-\def\kbdfoo#1#2#3\par{\def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
+-\ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
+-\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi
+-\else{\tclose{\kbdfont\look}}\fi}
+-
+-% For @indicateurl, @env, @command quotes seem unnecessary, so use \code.
+-\let\indicateurl=\code
+-\let\env=\code
+-\let\command=\code
+-
+-% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
+-\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
+-
+-% @clickstyle @arrow (by default)
+-\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
+-\def\click{\arrow}
+-
+-% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') takes an optional (comma-separated)
+-% second argument specifying the text to display and an optional third
+-% arg as text to display instead of (rather than in addition to) the url
+-% itself. First (mandatory) arg is the url. Perhaps eventually put in
+-% a hypertex \special here.
+-%
+-\def\uref#1{\douref #1,,,\finish}
+-\def\douref#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{\begingroup
+- \unsepspaces
+- \pdfurl{#1}%
+- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+- \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+- \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
+- \else
+- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+- \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+- \ifpdf
+- \unhbox0 % PDF: 2nd arg given, show only it
+- \else
+- \unhbox0\ (\code{#1})% DVI: 2nd arg given, show both it and url
+- \fi
+- \else
+- \code{#1}% only url given, so show it
+- \fi
+- \fi
+- \endlink
+-\endgroup}
+-
+-% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
+-%
+-\let\url=\uref
+-
+-% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
+-% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
+-%
+-%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
+-\ifpdf
+- \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
+- \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
+- \unsepspaces
+- \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
+- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+- \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
+- \endlink
+- \endgroup}
+-\else
+- \let\email=\uref
+-\fi
+-
+-% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font. Since all the
+-% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
+-% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
+-% this property, we can check that font parameter.
+-%
+-\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
+-
+-% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'. The only reason for the
+-% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
+-%
+-\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
+-
+-\def\kbd#1{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdfoo\look??\par}
+-
+-% @l was never documented to mean ``switch to the Lisp font'',
+-% and it is not used as such in any manual I can find. We need it for
+-% Polish suppressed-l. --karl, 22sep96.
+-%\def\l#1{{\li #1}\null}
+-
+-% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
+-\def\r#1{{\rm #1}} % roman font
+-\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}} % smallcaps font
+-\def\ii#1{{\it #1}} % italic font
+-
+-% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
+-% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
+-% all-uppercase.
+-%
+-\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
+-\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+- {\selectfonts\lsize #1}%
+- \def\temp{#2}%
+- \ifx\temp\empty \else
+- \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
+-% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
+-%
+-\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
+-\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+- {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
+- \def\temp{#2}%
+- \ifx\temp\empty \else
+- \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
+-%
+-\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
+-
+-% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
+-% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
+-% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
+-% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
+-% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
+-%
+-% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
+-% that. The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
+-% font height.
+-%
+-% feymr - regular
+-% feymo - slanted
+-% feybr - bold
+-% feybo - bold slanted
+-%
+-% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
+-% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
+-% Hmm.
+-%
+-% Also doesn't work in math. Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
+-% Hope not.
+-%
+-%
+-\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
+-\def\eurofont{%
+- % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
+- % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
+- % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
+- % font installed.
+- %
+- % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
+- % that to the current nominal size.
+- %
+- % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
+- % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
+- %
+- \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
+- %
+- \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
+- % bold:
+- \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
+- \else
+- % regular:
+- \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
+- \fi
+- \thiseurofont
+-}
+-
+-% Hacks for glyphs from the EC fonts similar to \euro. We don't
+-% use \let for the aliases, because sometimes we redefine the original
+-% macro, and the alias should reflect the redefinition.
+-\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
+-\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
+-\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
+-\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
+-\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
+-\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
+-\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
+-\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
+-%
+-\def\ecfont{%
+- % We can't distinguish serif/sanserif and italic/slanted, but this
+- % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
+- % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
+- % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
+- \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
+- \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
+- \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
+- % bold:
+- \font\thisecfont = ecb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
+- \else
+- % regular:
+- \font\thisecfont = ec\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
+- \fi
+- \thisecfont
+-}
+-
+-% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle. The font for the R should really
+-% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
+-% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
+-%
+-\def\registeredsymbol{%
+- $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\selectfonts\lllsize R}%
+- \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
+- }$%
+-}
+-
+-% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
+-%
+-\def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
+-
+-% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
+-% Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14) (68K) 16 APR 2004 02:38
+-% so we'll define it if necessary.
+-%
+-\ifx\Orb\undefined
+-\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
+-\fi
+-
+-% Quotes.
+-\chardef\quotedblleft="5C
+-\chardef\quotedblright=`\"
+-\chardef\quoteleft=`\`
+-\chardef\quoteright=`\'
+-
+-
+-\message{page headings,}
+-
+-\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
+-\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
+-
+-% First the title page. Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
+-\newif\ifseenauthor
+-\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
+-
+-% Do an implicit @contents or @shortcontents after @end titlepage if the
+-% user says @setcontentsaftertitlepage or @setshortcontentsaftertitlepage.
+-%
+-\newif\ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+- \let\setcontentsaftertitlepage = \setcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+-\newif\ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+- \let\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage = \setshortcontentsaftertitlepagetrue
+-
+-\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{\begingroup\hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
+- \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
+-
+-\envdef\titlepage{%
+- % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
+- \begingroup
+- \parindent=0pt \textfonts
+- % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
+- \vglue\titlepagetopglue
+- % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
+- \finishedtitlepagetrue
+- %
+- % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
+- % at the top of the second. We don't want the ragged left on the second.
+- \let\oldpage = \page
+- \def\page{%
+- \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+- \finishtitlepage
+- \fi
+- \let\page = \oldpage
+- \page
+- \null
+- }%
+-}
+-
+-\def\Etitlepage{%
+- \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+- \finishtitlepage
+- \fi
+- % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
+- % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
+- % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
+- % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
+- \oldpage
+- \endgroup
+- %
+- % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
+- % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
+- \HEADINGSon
+- %
+- % If they want short, they certainly want long too.
+- \ifsetshortcontentsaftertitlepage
+- \shortcontents
+- \contents
+- \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+- \global\let\contents = \relax
+- \fi
+- %
+- \ifsetcontentsaftertitlepage
+- \contents
+- \global\let\contents = \relax
+- \global\let\shortcontents = \relax
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-\def\finishtitlepage{%
+- \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
+- \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
+- \finishedtitlepagetrue
+-}
+-
+-%%% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
+-
+-\let\subtitlerm=\tenrm
+-\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
+-
+-\def\authorfont{\authorrm \normalbaselineskip = 16pt \normalbaselines
+- \let\tt=\authortt}
+-
+-\parseargdef\title{%
+- \checkenv\titlepage
+- \leftline{\titlefonts\rm #1}
+- % print a rule at the page bottom also.
+- \finishedtitlepagefalse
+- \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
+-}
+-
+-\parseargdef\subtitle{%
+- \checkenv\titlepage
+- {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
+-}
+-
+-% @author should come last, but may come many times.
+-% It can also be used inside @quotation.
+-%
+-\parseargdef\author{%
+- \def\temp{\quotation}%
+- \ifx\thisenv\temp
+- \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
+- \else
+- \checkenv\titlepage
+- \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
+- {\authorfont \leftline{#1}}%
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-
+-%%% Set up page headings and footings.
+-
+-\let\thispage=\folio
+-
+-\newtoks\evenheadline % headline on even pages
+-\newtoks\oddheadline % headline on odd pages
+-\newtoks\evenfootline % footline on even pages
+-\newtoks\oddfootline % footline on odd pages
+-
+-% Now make TeX use those variables
+-\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
+- \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
+-\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
+- \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
+-\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
+-
+-% Commands to set those variables.
+-% For example, this is what @headings on does
+-% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
+-% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
+-% @evenfooting @thisfile||
+-% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
+-
+-
+-\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
+-\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+-\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+-\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+-
+-\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
+-\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+-\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+-\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+-
+-\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
+-
+-\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
+-\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+-\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+-\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+-
+-\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
+-\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+-\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+- \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
+- %
+- % Leave some space for the footline. Hopefully ok to assume
+- % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
+- \global\advance\pageheight by -12pt
+- \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
+-}
+-
+-\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
+-
+-% @evenheadingmarks top \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
+-% @evenheadingmarks bottom \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
+-%
+-% The same set of arguments for:
+-%
+-% @oddheadingmarks
+-% @evenfootingmarks
+-% @oddfootingmarks
+-% @everyheadingmarks
+-% @everyfootingmarks
+-
+-\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
+-\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
+-\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
+-\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
+-\def\everyheadingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
+- \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
+-\def\everyfootingmarks#1 {\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
+- \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
+-% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
+-\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
+- \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
+- \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
+-}
+-
+-\everyheadingmarks bottom
+-\everyfootingmarks bottom
+-
+-% @headings double turns headings on for double-sided printing.
+-% @headings single turns headings on for single-sided printing.
+-% @headings off turns them off.
+-% @headings on same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
+-% @headings after turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+-% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+-% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
+-% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
+-% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
+-
+-\def\headings #1 {\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
+-
+-\def\HEADINGSoff{%
+-\global\evenheadline={\hfil} \global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+-\global\oddheadline={\hfil} \global\oddfootline={\hfil}}
+-\HEADINGSoff
+-% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
+-% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
+-% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
+-% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
+-% edge of all pages.
+-\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
+-\global\pageno=1
+-\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+-\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+-\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+-}
+-\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+-
+-% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
+-% page number on top right.
+-\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
+-\global\pageno=1
+-\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+-\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+-\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+-}
+-\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
+-
+-\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
+-\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
+-\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
+-\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+-\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+-\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+-}
+-
+-\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
+-\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
+-\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+-\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+-\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+-\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapter\hfil\folio}}
+-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+-}
+-
+-% Subroutines used in generating headings
+-% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
+-% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
+-% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
+-\ifx\today\undefined
+-\def\today{%
+- \number\day\space
+- \ifcase\month
+- \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
+- \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
+- \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
+- \fi
+- \space\number\year}
+-\fi
+-
+-% @settitle line... specifies the title of the document, for headings.
+-% It generates no output of its own.
+-\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
+-\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
+-
+-
+-\message{tables,}
+-% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
+-
+-% default indentation of table text
+-\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
+-% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
+-\newdimen\itemindent \itemindent=.3in
+-% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
+-\newdimen\itemmargin \itemmargin=.1in
+-
+-% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
+-\newdimen\itemmax
+-
+-% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
+-% these defs.
+-% They also define \itemindex
+-% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
+-
+-\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
+-
+-\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
+-
+-\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
+-\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
+-
+-\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
+- \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+- \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
+- \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
+- \itemindex{#1}%
+- \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
+- %
+- % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
+- % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
+- % line. We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
+- % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
+- % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
+- \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
+- %
+- % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
+- % but leave it ragged-right.
+- \begingroup
+- \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
+- \advance\hsize by\tableindent
+- \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil
+- \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
+- \endgroup
+- %
+- % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
+- % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
+- \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
+- %
+- % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up. However, if
+- % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
+- % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
+- % cause the example and the item to crash together. So we use this
+- % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
+- % \parskip glue after all. Section titles are handled this way also.
+- %
+- \penalty 10001
+- \endgroup
+- \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
+- \else
+- % The item text fits into the space. Start a paragraph, so that the
+- % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
+- \noindent
+- % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
+- % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
+- % eventually be printed.
+- \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
+- \dimen0 = \itemmax \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
+- \unhbox0
+- \nobreak\kern\dimen0
+- \endgroup
+- \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
+-\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
+-
+-% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
+-\envdef\table{%
+- \let\itemindex\gobble
+- \tablecheck{table}%
+-}
+-\envdef\ftable{%
+- \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
+- \tablecheck{ftable}%
+-}
+-\envdef\vtable{%
+- \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
+- \tablecheck{vtable}%
+-}
+-\def\tablecheck#1{%
+- \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
+- \endgroup
+- \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
+- that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
+- \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
+- \else
+- \let\next\tablex
+- \fi
+- \next
+-}
+-\def\tablex#1{%
+- \def\itemindicate{#1}%
+- \parsearg\tabley
+-}
+-\def\tabley#1{%
+- {%
+- \makevalueexpandable
+- \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
+- \expandafter
+- }\temp \endtablez
+-}
+-\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
+- \aboveenvbreak
+- \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
+- \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
+- \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
+- \itemmax=\tableindent
+- \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
+- \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
+- \exdentamount=\tableindent
+- \parindent = 0pt
+- \parskip = \smallskipamount
+- \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
+- \let\item = \internalBitem
+- \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
+-}
+-\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
+-\let\Eftable\Etable
+-\let\Evtable\Etable
+-\let\Eitemize\Etable
+-\let\Eenumerate\Etable
+-
+-% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
+-
+-\newcount \itemno
+-
+-\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
+-
+-\def\doitemize#1{%
+- \aboveenvbreak
+- \itemmax=\itemindent
+- \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
+- \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
+- \exdentamount=\itemindent
+- \parindent=0pt
+- \parskip=\smallskipamount
+- \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
+- \def\itemcontents{#1}%
+- % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
+- \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
+- \let\item=\itemizeitem
+-}
+-
+-% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
+-%
+-\def\itemizeitem{%
+- \advance\itemno by 1 % for enumerations
+- {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
+- {%
+- % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
+- % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
+- % done a \vskip-\parskip. In that case, we don't want to zero
+- % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading. On the
+- % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
+- % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
+- % space. In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before. At least
+- % that's the theory.
+- \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
+- \noindent
+- \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
+- \vadjust{\penalty 1200}}% not good to break after first line of item.
+- \flushcr
+-}
+-
+-% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
+-% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
+-%
+-\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
+-
+-% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
+-% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list. No
+-% argument is the same as `1'.
+-%
+-\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1 \endenumeratey}
+-\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
+- % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
+- \def\thearg{#1}%
+- \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
+- %
+- % Detect if the argument is a single token. If so, it might be a
+- % letter. Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
+- % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
+- % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
+- % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
+- \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
+- \ifx\rest\empty
+- % Only one token in the argument. It could still be anything.
+- % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
+- % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
+- % not equal to itself.
+- % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
+- %
+- % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
+- % continuing to look for a <number>.
+- %
+- \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
+- \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
+- \else
+- % It's a letter.
+- \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
+- \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
+- \else
+- \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
+- \fi
+- \fi
+- \else
+- % Multiple tokens in the argument. We hope it's a number.
+- \numericenumerate
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-% An @enumerate whose labels are integers. The starting integer is
+-% given in \thearg.
+-%
+-\def\numericenumerate{%
+- \itemno = \thearg
+- \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
+-}
+-
+-% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
+-\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
+- \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+- \startenumeration{%
+- % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+- \ifnum\itemno=0
+- \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+- alphabet}%
+- \fi
+- \char\lccode\itemno
+- }%
+-}
+-
+-% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
+-\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
+- \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+- \startenumeration{%
+- % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+- \ifnum\itemno=0
+- \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+- alphabet}
+- \fi
+- \char\uccode\itemno
+- }%
+-}
+-
+-% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
+-% common last two arguments. Also subtract one from the initial value in
+-% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
+-%
+-\def\startenumeration#1{%
+- \advance\itemno by -1
+- \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
+-}
+-
+-% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
+-% to @enumerate.
+-%
+-\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
+-\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
+-\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+-\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+-
+-
+-% @multitable macros
+-% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
+-%
+-% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
+-% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble. Width
+-% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
+-% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
+-
+-% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
+-
+-% To make preamble:
+-%
+-% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
+-% @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
+-% @item ...
+-%
+-% Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
+-% current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
+-% columns as desired.
+-
+-
+-% Or use a template:
+-% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+-% @item ...
+-% using the widest term desired in each column.
+-
+-% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
+-% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
+-% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
+-% ie, @tab at tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
+-
+-% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
+-% if they are.
+-
+-% Sample multitable:
+-
+-% @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+-% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
+-% @item
+-% first col stuff
+-% @tab
+-% second col stuff
+-% @tab
+-% third col
+-% @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
+-% @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
+-%
+-% They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
+-% @item at tab@tab This will be in third column.
+-% @end multitable
+-
+-% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
+-% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
+-% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
+-% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
+-% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
+-% to baseline.
+-% 0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
+-%
+-\newskip\multitableparskip
+-\newskip\multitableparindent
+-\newdimen\multitablecolspace
+-\newskip\multitablelinespace
+-\multitableparskip=0pt
+-\multitableparindent=6pt
+-\multitablecolspace=12pt
+-\multitablelinespace=0pt
+-
+-% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
+-%
+-\let\endsetuptable\relax
+-\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
+-\let\columnfractions\relax
+-\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
+-\newif\ifsetpercent
+-
+-% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
+-% be just 1. We just use it, whatever it is.
+-%
+-\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
+- \global\advance\colcount by 1
+- \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
+- \setuptable
+-}
+-
+-\newcount\colcount
+-\def\setuptable#1{%
+- \def\firstarg{#1}%
+- \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
+- \let\go = \relax
+- \else
+- \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
+- \global\setpercenttrue
+- \else
+- \ifsetpercent
+- \let\go\pickupwholefraction
+- \else
+- \global\advance\colcount by 1
+- \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
+- % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
+- \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
+- \fi
+- \fi
+- \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
+- % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
+- % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
+- \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
+- \else
+- \let\go = \setuptable
+- \fi%
+- \fi
+- \go
+-}
+-
+-% multitable-only commands.
+-%
+-% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.
+-% Assignments have to be global since we are inside the implicit group
+-% of an alignment entry. Note that \everycr resets \everytab.
+-\def\headitem{\checkenv\multitable \crcr \global\everytab={\bf}\the\everytab}%
+-%
+-% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp. But then the space in a template
+-% line is not enough. That is bad. So let's go back to just `&' until
+-% we encounter the problem it was intended to solve again.
+-% --karl, nathan at acm.org, 20apr99.
+-\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
+-
+-% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
+-%
+-\newtoks\everytab % insert after every tab.
+-%
+-\envdef\multitable{%
+- \vskip\parskip
+- \startsavinginserts
+- %
+- % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
+- % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
+- % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
+- % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
+- \def\item{\crcr}%
+- %
+- \tolerance=9500
+- \hbadness=9500
+- \setmultitablespacing
+- \parskip=\multitableparskip
+- \parindent=\multitableparindent
+- \overfullrule=0pt
+- \global\colcount=0
+- %
+- \everycr = {%
+- \noalign{%
+- \global\everytab={}%
+- \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
+- % Check for saved footnotes, etc.
+- \checkinserts
+- % Keeps underfull box messages off when table breaks over pages.
+- %\filbreak
+- % Maybe so, but it also creates really weird page breaks when the
+- % table breaks over pages. Wouldn't \vfil be better? Wait until the
+- % problem manifests itself, so it can be fixed for real --karl.
+- }%
+- }%
+- %
+- \parsearg\domultitable
+-}
+-\def\domultitable#1{%
+- % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
+- \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
+- %
+- % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
+- % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
+- % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
+- % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
+- \halign\bgroup &%
+- \global\advance\colcount by 1
+- \multistrut
+- \vtop{%
+- % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
+- \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
+- %
+- % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
+- % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
+- % the first one.
+- %
+- % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
+- % to the width of each template entry.
+- %
+- % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
+- % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
+- % will keep entries from bumping into each other. Table will start at
+- % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
+- %
+- % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
+- \rightskip=0pt
+- \ifnum\colcount=1
+- % The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
+- \advance\hsize by\leftskip
+- \else
+- \ifsetpercent \else
+- % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
+- % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
+- \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
+- \fi
+- % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
+- \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
+- \fi
+- % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
+- % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
+- % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
+- % For example:
+- % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
+- % @item @code{#}
+- % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
+- % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
+- % marking characters.
+- \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
+- }\cr
+-}
+-\def\Emultitable{%
+- \crcr
+- \egroup % end the \halign
+- \global\setpercentfalse
+-}
+-
+-\def\setmultitablespacing{%
+- \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
+- %
+- % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
+- % \multitableparskip calculation. We used define \multistrut based on
+- % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
+- % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
+-\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
+-\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
+-\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
+-\fi
+-%% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
+-%% table. If not, do nothing.
+-%% If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
+-\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
+-\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+-\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+- %% than skip between lines in the table.
+-\fi%
+-\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
+-\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+-\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt %% to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+- %% than skip between lines in the table.
+-\fi}
+-
+-
+-\message{conditionals,}
+-
+-% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
+-% @ifnotxml always succeed. They currently do nothing; we don't
+-% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested. But we
+-% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
+-% attempt to close an environment group.
+-%
+-\def\makecond#1{%
+- \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
+- \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
+-}
+-\makecond{iftex}
+-\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
+-\makecond{ifnothtml}
+-\makecond{ifnotinfo}
+-\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
+-\makecond{ifnotxml}
+-
+-% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
+-%
+-\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
+-\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
+-\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
+-\def\html{\doignore{html}}
+-\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
+-\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
+-\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
+-\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
+-\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
+-\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
+-\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
+-\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
+-\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
+-
+-% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
+-%
+-% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
+-\newcount\doignorecount
+-
+-\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
+- % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
+- \obeylines
+- \catcode`\@ = \other
+- \catcode`\{ = \other
+- \catcode`\} = \other
+- %
+- % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
+- \spaceisspace
+- %
+- % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
+- \doignorecount = 0
+- %
+- % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
+- \dodoignore{#1}%
+-}
+-
+-{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
+- \obeylines %
+- %
+- \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
+- % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
+- %
+- % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
+- \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M at end #1{%
+- \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
+- %
+- % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
+- % line. (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
+- % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
+- \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
+- %
+- % And now expand that command.
+- \doignoretext ^^M%
+- }%
+-}
+-
+-\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
+- \def\temp{#1}%
+- \ifx\temp\empty % Nothing found.
+- \let\next\doignoretextzzz
+- \else % Found a nested condition, ...
+- \advance\doignorecount by 1
+- \let\next\doignoretextyyy % ..., look for another.
+- % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
+- \fi
+- \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
+-}
+-
+-% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
+-%
+-\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
+- \ifnum\doignorecount = 0 % We have just found the outermost @end.
+- \let\next\enddoignore
+- \else % Still inside a nested condition.
+- \advance\doignorecount by -1
+- \let\next\doignoretext % Look for the next @end.
+- \fi
+- \next
+-}
+-
+-% Finish off ignored text.
+-{ \obeylines%
+- % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
+- % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
+- % would result in a blank line in the output.
+- \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
+-}
+-
+-
+-% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
+-% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
+-%
+-% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
+-% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
+-% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
+-% didn't need it.
+-% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
+-%
+-\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
+-\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
+- {%
+- \makevalueexpandable
+- \def\temp{#2}%
+- \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
+- \ifx\temp\empty
+- \next{}%
+- \else
+- \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
+- \fi
+- }%
+-}
+-% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
+-\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
+-
+-% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
+-%
+-\parseargdef\clear{%
+- {%
+- \makevalueexpandable
+- \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
+- }%
+-}
+-
+-% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
+-\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
+-\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
+-{
+- \catcode`\- = \active \catcode`\_ = \active
+- %
+- \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
+- \let\value = \expandablevalue
+- % We don't want these characters active, ...
+- \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
+- % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
+- % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
+- % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
+- \let-\realdash \let_\normalunderscore
+- }
+-}
+-
+-% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
+-% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
+-% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
+-% the result winds up in the index file. This means that if the
+-% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
+-% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
+-% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
+-%
+-\def\expandablevalue#1{%
+- \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+- {[No value for ``#1'']}%
+- \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
+- \else
+- \csname SET#1\endcsname
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
+-% with @set.
+-%
+-% To get special treatment of `@end ifset,' call \makeond and the redefine.
+-%
+-\makecond{ifset}
+-\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
+-\def\doifset#1#2{%
+- {%
+- \makevalueexpandable
+- \let\next=\empty
+- \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
+- #1% If not set, redefine \next.
+- \fi
+- \expandafter
+- }\next
+-}
+-\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
+-
+-% @ifclear VAR ... @end ifclear reads the `...' iff VAR has never been
+-% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
+-%
+-% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
+-% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
+-% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
+-%
+-\makecond{ifclear}
+-\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
+-\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
+-
+-% @dircategory CATEGORY -- specify a category of the dir file
+-% which this file should belong to. Ignore this in TeX.
+-\let\dircategory=\comment
+-
+-% @defininfoenclose.
+-\let\definfoenclose=\comment
+-
+-
+-\message{indexing,}
+-% Index generation facilities
+-
+-% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
+-% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
+-\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
+-
+-% \newindex {foo} defines an index named foo.
+-% It automatically defines \fooindex such that
+-% \fooindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index foo.
+-% It also defines \fooindfile to be the number of the output channel for
+-% the file that accumulates this index. The file's extension is foo.
+-% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
+-% for the sake of vms.
+-%
+-\def\newindex#1{%
+- \iflinks
+- \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+- \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1 % Open the file
+- \fi
+- \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{% % Define @#1index
+- \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
+-}
+-
+-% @defindex foo == \newindex{foo}
+-%
+-\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
+-
+-% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
+-%
+-\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
+-%
+-\def\newcodeindex#1{%
+- \iflinks
+- \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+- \openout \csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.#1
+- \fi
+- \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
+- \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
+-}
+-
+-
+-% @synindex foo bar makes index foo feed into index bar.
+-% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
+-%
+-% @syncodeindex foo bar similar, but put all entries made for index foo
+-% inside @code.
+-%
+-\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
+-\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
+-
+-% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
+-% #3 the target index (bar).
+-\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
+- % Only do \closeout if we haven't already done it, else we'll end up
+- % closing the target index.
+- \expandafter \ifx\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname \relax
+- % The \closeout helps reduce unnecessary open files; the limit on the
+- % Acorn RISC OS is a mere 16 files.
+- \expandafter\closeout\csname#2indfile\endcsname
+- \expandafter\let\csname donesynindex#2\endcsname = 1
+- \fi
+- % redefine \fooindfile:
+- \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
+- \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
+- % redefine \fooindex:
+- \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
+-}
+-
+-% Define \doindex, the driver for all \fooindex macros.
+-% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
+-% and it is "foo", the name of the index.
+-
+-% \doindex just uses \parsearg; it calls \doind for the actual work.
+-% This is because \doind is more useful to call from other macros.
+-
+-% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
+-% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
+-
+-\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singleindexer}
+-\def\singleindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
+-
+-% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
+-\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\singlecodeindexer}
+-\def\singlecodeindexer #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
+-
+-% Take care of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
+-% Since there are some commands we want to expand, and others we don't,
+-% we have to laboriously prevent expansion for those that we don't.
+-%
+-\def\indexdummies{%
+- \escapechar = `\\ % use backslash in output files.
+- \def\@{@}% change to @@ when we switch to @ as escape char in index files.
+- \def\ {\realbackslash\space }%
+- %
+- % Need these in case \tex is in effect and \{ is a \delimiter again.
+- % But can't use \lbracecmd and \rbracecmd because texindex assumes
+- % braces and backslashes are used only as delimiters.
+- \let\{ = \mylbrace
+- \let\} = \myrbrace
+- %
+- % I don't entirely understand this, but when an index entry is
+- % generated from a macro call, the \endinput which \scanmacro inserts
+- % causes processing to be prematurely terminated. This is,
+- % apparently, because \indexsorttmp is fully expanded, and \endinput
+- % is an expandable command. The redefinition below makes \endinput
+- % disappear altogether for that purpose -- although logging shows that
+- % processing continues to some further point. On the other hand, it
+- % seems \endinput does not hurt in the printed index arg, since that
+- % is still getting written without apparent harm.
+- %
+- % Sample source (mac-idx3.tex, reported by Graham Percival to
+- % help-texinfo, 22may06):
+- % @macro funindex {WORD}
+- % @findex xyz
+- % @end macro
+- % ...
+- % @funindex commtest
+- %
+- % The above is not enough to reproduce the bug, but it gives the flavor.
+- %
+- % Sample whatsit resulting:
+- % . at write3{\entry{xyz}{@folio }{@code {xyz at endinput }}}
+- %
+- % So:
+- \let\endinput = \empty
+- %
+- % Do the redefinitions.
+- \commondummies
+-}
+-
+-% For the aux and toc files, @ is the escape character. So we want to
+-% redefine everything using @ as the escape character (instead of
+-% \realbackslash, still used for index files). When everything uses @,
+-% this will be simpler.
+-%
+-\def\atdummies{%
+- \def\@{@@}%
+- \def\ {@ }%
+- \let\{ = \lbraceatcmd
+- \let\} = \rbraceatcmd
+- %
+- % Do the redefinitions.
+- \commondummies
+- \otherbackslash
+-}
+-
+-% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies.
+-%
+-\def\commondummies{%
+- %
+- % \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
+- % preventing its expansion. This is used only for control% words,
+- % not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
+- % control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
+- % from whatever follows.
+- %
+- % For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
+- % space.
+- %
+- % These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
+- % those that do not. If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
+- % that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
+- %
+- \def\definedummyword ##1{\def##1{\string##1\space}}%
+- \def\definedummyletter##1{\def##1{\string##1}}%
+- \let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
+- %
+- \commondummiesnofonts
+- %
+- \definedummyletter\_%
+- %
+- % Non-English letters.
+- \definedummyword\AA
+- \definedummyword\AE
+- \definedummyword\L
+- \definedummyword\OE
+- \definedummyword\O
+- \definedummyword\aa
+- \definedummyword\ae
+- \definedummyword\l
+- \definedummyword\oe
+- \definedummyword\o
+- \definedummyword\ss
+- \definedummyword\exclamdown
+- \definedummyword\questiondown
+- \definedummyword\ordf
+- \definedummyword\ordm
+- %
+- % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
+- \definedummyword\bf
+- \definedummyword\gtr
+- \definedummyword\hat
+- \definedummyword\less
+- \definedummyword\sf
+- \definedummyword\sl
+- \definedummyword\tclose
+- \definedummyword\tt
+- %
+- \definedummyword\LaTeX
+- \definedummyword\TeX
+- %
+- % Assorted special characters.
+- \definedummyword\bullet
+- \definedummyword\comma
+- \definedummyword\copyright
+- \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
+- \definedummyword\dots
+- \definedummyword\enddots
+- \definedummyword\equiv
+- \definedummyword\error
+- \definedummyword\euro
+- \definedummyword\guillemetleft
+- \definedummyword\guillemetright
+- \definedummyword\guilsinglleft
+- \definedummyword\guilsinglright
+- \definedummyword\expansion
+- \definedummyword\minus
+- \definedummyword\pounds
+- \definedummyword\point
+- \definedummyword\print
+- \definedummyword\quotedblbase
+- \definedummyword\quotedblleft
+- \definedummyword\quotedblright
+- \definedummyword\quoteleft
+- \definedummyword\quoteright
+- \definedummyword\quotesinglbase
+- \definedummyword\result
+- \definedummyword\textdegree
+- %
+- % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
+- \macrolist
+- %
+- \normalturnoffactive
+- %
+- % Handle some cases of @value -- where it does not contain any
+- % (non-fully-expandable) commands.
+- \makevalueexpandable
+-}
+-
+-% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \commondummies and \indexnofonts.
+-%
+-\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
+- % Control letters and accents.
+- \definedummyletter\!%
+- \definedummyaccent\"%
+- \definedummyaccent\'%
+- \definedummyletter\*%
+- \definedummyaccent\,%
+- \definedummyletter\.%
+- \definedummyletter\/%
+- \definedummyletter\:%
+- \definedummyaccent\=%
+- \definedummyletter\?%
+- \definedummyaccent\^%
+- \definedummyaccent\`%
+- \definedummyaccent\~%
+- \definedummyword\u
+- \definedummyword\v
+- \definedummyword\H
+- \definedummyword\dotaccent
+- \definedummyword\ringaccent
+- \definedummyword\tieaccent
+- \definedummyword\ubaraccent
+- \definedummyword\udotaccent
+- \definedummyword\dotless
+- %
+- % Texinfo font commands.
+- \definedummyword\b
+- \definedummyword\i
+- \definedummyword\r
+- \definedummyword\sc
+- \definedummyword\t
+- %
+- % Commands that take arguments.
+- \definedummyword\acronym
+- \definedummyword\cite
+- \definedummyword\code
+- \definedummyword\command
+- \definedummyword\dfn
+- \definedummyword\emph
+- \definedummyword\env
+- \definedummyword\file
+- \definedummyword\kbd
+- \definedummyword\key
+- \definedummyword\math
+- \definedummyword\option
+- \definedummyword\pxref
+- \definedummyword\ref
+- \definedummyword\samp
+- \definedummyword\strong
+- \definedummyword\tie
+- \definedummyword\uref
+- \definedummyword\url
+- \definedummyword\var
+- \definedummyword\verb
+- \definedummyword\w
+- \definedummyword\xref
+-}
+-
+-% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
+-% by, and when constructing control sequence names. It eliminates all
+-% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
+-% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
+-%
+-\def\indexnofonts{%
+- % Accent commands should become @asis.
+- \def\definedummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
+- % We can just ignore other control letters.
+- \def\definedummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
+- % Hopefully, all control words can become @asis.
+- \let\definedummyword\definedummyaccent
+- %
+- \commondummiesnofonts
+- %
+- % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
+- % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
+- % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
+- %\let\tt=\asis
+- %
+- \def\ { }%
+- \def\@{@}%
+- % how to handle braces?
+- \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
+- %
+- % Non-English letters.
+- \def\AA{AA}%
+- \def\AE{AE}%
+- \def\L{L}%
+- \def\OE{OE}%
+- \def\O{O}%
+- \def\aa{aa}%
+- \def\ae{ae}%
+- \def\l{l}%
+- \def\oe{oe}%
+- \def\o{o}%
+- \def\ss{ss}%
+- \def\exclamdown{!}%
+- \def\questiondown{?}%
+- \def\ordf{a}%
+- \def\ordm{o}%
+- %
+- \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
+- \def\TeX{TeX}%
+- %
+- % Assorted special characters.
+- % (The following {} will end up in the sort string, but that's ok.)
+- \def\bullet{bullet}%
+- \def\comma{,}%
+- \def\copyright{copyright}%
+- \def\registeredsymbol{R}%
+- \def\dots{...}%
+- \def\enddots{...}%
+- \def\equiv{==}%
+- \def\error{error}%
+- \def\euro{euro}%
+- \def\guillemetleft{<<}%
+- \def\guillemetright{>>}%
+- \def\guilsinglleft{<}%
+- \def\guilsinglright{>}%
+- \def\expansion{==>}%
+- \def\minus{-}%
+- \def\pounds{pounds}%
+- \def\point{.}%
+- \def\print{-|}%
+- \def\quotedblbase{"}%
+- \def\quotedblleft{"}%
+- \def\quotedblright{"}%
+- \def\quoteleft{`}%
+- \def\quoteright{'}%
+- \def\quotesinglbase{,}%
+- \def\result{=>}%
+- \def\textdegree{degrees}%
+- %
+- % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
+- % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
+- % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
+- % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
+- % that starts with \.
+- %
+- % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
+- % to take a single TeX argument. The case of a macro invocation that
+- % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
+- %
+- \macrolist
+-}
+-
+-\let\indexbackslash=0 %overridden during \printindex.
+-\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
+-
+-% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
+-% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
+-\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
+-
+-% Workhorse for all \fooindexes.
+-% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
+-% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
+-% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
+-%
+-\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
+- \iflinks
+- {%
+- % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
+- \toks0 = {#2}%
+- % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
+- \def\thirdarg{#3}%
+- \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
+- \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
+- \fi
+- %
+- \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
+- %
+- \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
+- }%
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file:
+-%
+-\def\dosubindwrite{%
+- % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
+- \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
+- \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
+- \fi
+- %
+- % Remember, we are within a group.
+- \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+- \def\backslashcurfont{\indexbackslash}% \indexbackslash isn't defined now
+- % so it will be output as is; and it will print as backslash.
+- %
+- % Process the index entry with all font commands turned off, to
+- % get the string to sort by.
+- {\indexnofonts
+- \edef\temp{\the\toks0}% need full expansion
+- \xdef\indexsorttmp{\temp}%
+- }%
+- %
+- % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
+- % the original text, including any font commands. We write
+- % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
+- % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
+- % sorted result.
+- \edef\temp{%
+- \write\writeto{%
+- \string\entry{\indexsorttmp}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
+- }%
+- \temp
+-}
+-
+-% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
+-%
+-% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
+-% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
+-% the skip again. Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
+-% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero. The result is that
+-% sequences like this:
+-% @end defun
+-% @tindex whatever
+-% @defun ...
+-% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
+-% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
+-% the previous defun.
+-%
+-% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode. We
+-% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
+-%
+-% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
+-%
+-% But wait, there is a catch there:
+-% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip. \ifdim is not
+-% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
+-% of the skip. The only way seems to be to check the textual
+-% representation of the skip.
+-%
+-% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
+-% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
+-%
+-\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z at skip\endcsname}
+-%
+-\newskip\whatsitskip
+-\newcount\whatsitpenalty
+-%
+-% ..., ready, GO:
+-%
+-\def\safewhatsit#1{%
+-\ifhmode
+- #1%
+-\else
+- % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
+- \whatsitskip = \lastskip
+- \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
+- \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
+- %
+- % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
+- % skip. And since a skip is discardable, that means this
+- % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
+- % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
+- % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
+- \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
+- \else
+- \vskip-\whatsitskip
+- \fi
+- %
+- #1%
+- %
+- \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
+- % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
+- % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak. In that case, we want
+- % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
+- % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
+- % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint. For example:
+- %
+- % @deffn deffn-whatever
+- % @vindex index-whatever
+- % Description.
+- % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
+- % and the "Description." paragraph.
+- \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
+- \else
+- % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
+- % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
+- % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
+- \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
+- \fi
+-\fi
+-}
+-
+-% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
+-% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
+-% or
+-% \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
+-% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
+-% containing these kinds of lines:
+-% \initial {c}
+-% before the first topic whose initial is c
+-% \entry {topic}{pagelist}
+-% for a topic that is used without subtopics
+-% \primary {topic}
+-% for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
+-% \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
+-% for each subtopic.
+-
+-% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
+-% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
+-
+-\def\findex {\fnindex}
+-\def\kindex {\kyindex}
+-\def\cindex {\cpindex}
+-\def\vindex {\vrindex}
+-\def\tindex {\tpindex}
+-\def\pindex {\pgindex}
+-
+-\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
+-{\obeylines %
+-\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
+-\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
+-
+-% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
+-
+-% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
+-% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
+-%
+-\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
+- \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
+- %
+- \smallfonts \rm
+- \tolerance = 9500
+- \plainfrenchspacing
+- \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
+- %
+- % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
+- % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
+- % \initial {@}
+- % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
+- % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
+- \catcode`\@ = 11
+- \openin 1 \jobname.#1s
+- \ifeof 1
+- % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
+- % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
+- % index. The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
+- % there is some text.
+- \putwordIndexNonexistent
+- \else
+- %
+- % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
+- % false. We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
+- % it can discover if there is anything in it.
+- \read 1 to \temp
+- \ifeof 1
+- \putwordIndexIsEmpty
+- \else
+- % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
+- % character. It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
+- % to make right now.
+- \def\indexbackslash{\backslashcurfont}%
+- \catcode`\\ = 0
+- \escapechar = `\\
+- \begindoublecolumns
+- \input \jobname.#1s
+- \enddoublecolumns
+- \fi
+- \fi
+- \closein 1
+-\endgroup}
+-
+-% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
+-% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
+-
+-\def\initial#1{{%
+- % Some minor font changes for the special characters.
+- \let\tentt=\sectt \let\tt=\sectt \let\sf=\sectt
+- %
+- % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
+- \removelastskip
+- %
+- % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
+- \nobreak
+- \vskip 0pt plus 3\baselineskip
+- \penalty 0
+- \vskip 0pt plus -3\baselineskip
+- %
+- % Typeset the initial. Making this add up to a whole number of
+- % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
+- % to column. It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
+- % we need before each entry, but it's better.
+- %
+- % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
+- \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus .5\baselineskip
+- \leftline{\secbf #1}%
+- % Do our best not to break after the initial.
+- \nobreak
+- \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
+-}}
+-
+-% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
+-% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin. It is used for index
+-% and table of contents entries. The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
+-%
+-% A straightforward implementation would start like this:
+-% \def\entry#1#2{...
+-% But this freezes the catcodes in the argument, and can cause problems to
+-% @code, which sets - active. This problem was fixed by a kludge---
+-% ``-'' was active throughout whole index, but this isn't really right.
+-%
+-% The right solution is to prevent \entry from swallowing the whole text.
+-% --kasal, 21nov03
+-\def\entry{%
+- \begingroup
+- %
+- % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
+- % affect previous text.
+- \par
+- %
+- % Do not fill out the last line with white space.
+- \parfillskip = 0in
+- %
+- % No extra space above this paragraph.
+- \parskip = 0in
+- %
+- % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
+- \finalhyphendemerits = 0
+- %
+- % \hangindent is only relevant when the entry text and page number
+- % don't both fit on one line. In that case, bob suggests starting the
+- % dots pretty far over on the line. Unfortunately, a large
+- % indentation looks wrong when the entry text itself is broken across
+- % lines. So we use a small indentation and put up with long leaders.
+- %
+- % \hangafter is reset to 1 (which is the value we want) at the start
+- % of each paragraph, so we need not do anything with that.
+- \hangindent = 2em
+- %
+- % When the entry text needs to be broken, just fill out the first line
+- % with blank space.
+- \rightskip = 0pt plus1fil
+- %
+- % A bit of stretch before each entry for the benefit of balancing
+- % columns.
+- \vskip 0pt plus1pt
+- %
+- % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
+- \afterassignment\doentry
+- \let\temp =
+-}
+-\def\doentry{%
+- \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
+- \noindent
+- \aftergroup\finishentry
+- % And now comes the text of the entry.
+-}
+-\def\finishentry#1{%
+- % #1 is the page number.
+- %
+- % The following is kludged to not output a line of dots in the index if
+- % there are no page numbers. The next person who breaks this will be
+- % cursed by a Unix daemon.
+- \setbox\boxA = \hbox{#1}%
+- \ifdim\wd\boxA = 0pt
+- \ %
+- \else
+- %
+- % If we must, put the page number on a line of its own, and fill out
+- % this line with blank space. (The \hfil is overwhelmed with the
+- % fill leaders glue in \indexdotfill if the page number does fit.)
+- \hfil\penalty50
+- \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+- %
+- % The `\ ' here is removed by the implicit \unskip that TeX does as
+- % part of (the primitive) \par. Without it, a spurious underfull
+- % \hbox ensues.
+- \ifpdf
+- \pdfgettoks#1.%
+- \ \the\toksA
+- \else
+- \ #1%
+- \fi
+- \fi
+- \par
+- \endgroup
+-}
+-
+-% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
+-\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
+- \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1fill}
+-
+-\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
+-
+-\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
+-\def\secondary#1#2{{%
+- \parfillskip=0in
+- \parskip=0in
+- \hangindent=1in
+- \hangafter=1
+- \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
+- \ifpdf
+- \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
+- \else
+- #2
+- \fi
+- \par
+-}}
+-
+-% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
+-% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
+-% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
+-\catcode`\@=11
+-
+-\newbox\partialpage
+-\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
+-
+-\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
+- % Grab any single-column material above us.
+- \output = {%
+- %
+- % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
+- % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
+- % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
+- % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off). In
+- % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
+- % output routine. Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
+- % runs and this will be a no-op. See the indexspread.tex test case.
+- \ifvoid\partialpage \else
+- \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
+- \fi
+- %
+- \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
+- % Unvbox the main output page.
+- \unvbox\PAGE
+- \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
+- }%
+- }%
+- \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
+- %
+- % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
+- \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
+- %
+- % Change the page size parameters. We could do this once outside this
+- % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
+- % format, but then we repeat the same computation. Repeating a couple
+- % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
+- % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
+- %
+- % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
+- % the columns. We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
+- % changes automatically with the paper format. The magic constant
+- % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
+- % as it did when we hard-coded it.
+- %
+- % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
+- % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
+- % been clobbered.
+- %
+- \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
+- \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
+- \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
+- \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+- %
+- % Double the \vsize as well. (We don't need a separate register here,
+- % since nobody clobbers \vsize.)
+- \vsize = 2\vsize
+-}
+-
+-% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
+-% the last.
+-%
+-\def\doublecolumnout{%
+- \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
+- % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
+- % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
+- % previous page.
+- \dimen@ = \vsize
+- \divide\dimen@ by 2
+- \advance\dimen@ by -\ht\partialpage
+- %
+- % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
+- \setbox0=\vsplit255 to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit255 to\dimen@
+- \onepageout\pagesofar
+- \unvbox255
+- \penalty\outputpenalty
+-}
+-%
+-% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
+-% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
+-\def\pagesofar{%
+- \unvbox\partialpage
+- %
+- \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+- \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
+- \hbox to\pagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
+-}
+-%
+-% All done with double columns.
+-\def\enddoublecolumns{%
+- % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
+- % _before_ we change the output routine. This is necessary in the
+- % following situation:
+- %
+- % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
+- % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
+- % break occurs before the last section starts. However, the last
+- % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
+- % fit on the page and has to be broken off. Without the following
+- % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
+- % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
+- % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
+- % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
+- % is wrong: The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
+- % the broken-off section in the recent contributions. As soon as
+- % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
+- % break. The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
+- % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
+- % goal. When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
+- % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
+- % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
+- % and the final section into the vbox of \pageheight (see
+- % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
+- %
+- % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
+- % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
+- \penalty0
+- %
+- \output = {%
+- % Split the last of the double-column material. Leave it on the
+- % current page, no automatic page break.
+- \balancecolumns
+- %
+- % If we end up splitting too much material for the current page,
+- % though, there will be another page break right after this \output
+- % invocation ends. Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
+- % want to call it again. Therefore, reset \output to its normal
+- % definition right away. (We hope \balancecolumns will never be
+- % called on to balance too much material, but if it is, this makes
+- % the output somewhat more palatable.)
+- \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
+- }%
+- \eject
+- \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
+- %
+- % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
+- % the current page. We're now back to normal single-column
+- % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize (after the
+- % \endgroup where \vsize got restored).
+- \pagegoal = \vsize
+-}
+-%
+-% Called at the end of the double column material.
+-\def\balancecolumns{%
+- \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox255}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
+- \dimen@ = \ht0
+- \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
+- \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
+- \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
+- %debug\message{final 2-column material height=\the\ht0, target=\the\dimen at .}%
+- \splittopskip = \topskip
+- % Loop until we get a decent breakpoint.
+- {%
+- \vbadness = 10000
+- \loop
+- \global\setbox3 = \copy0
+- \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
+- \ifdim\ht3>\dimen@
+- \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
+- \repeat
+- }%
+- %debug\message{split to \the\dimen@, column heights: \the\ht1, \the\ht3.}%
+- \setbox0=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox1}%
+- \setbox2=\vbox to\dimen@{\unvbox3}%
+- %
+- \pagesofar
+-}
+-\catcode`\@ = \other
+-
+-
+-\message{sectioning,}
+-% Chapters, sections, etc.
+-
+-% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron, of course. But we count the unnumbered
+-% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
+-% outlines by their "section number". We avoid collisions with chapter
+-% numbers by starting them at 10000. (If a document ever has 10000
+-% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
+-\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
+-\newcount\chapno
+-\newcount\secno \secno=0
+-\newcount\subsecno \subsecno=0
+-\newcount\subsubsecno \subsubsecno=0
+-
+-% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
+-\newcount\appendixno \appendixno = `\@
+-%
+-% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
+-% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
+-% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
+-% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
+-%
+-\def\appendixletter{%
+- \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
+- \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
+- % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
+- % expanded while writing the .toc file. \char\appendixno is not
+- % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
+- % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
+- \else\char\the\appendixno
+- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+- \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+-
+-% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
+-% and name of the chapter. Page headings and footings can use
+-% these. @section does likewise.
+-\def\thischapter{}
+-\def\thischapternum{}
+-\def\thischaptername{}
+-\def\thissection{}
+-\def\thissectionnum{}
+-\def\thissectionname{}
+-
+-\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
+-\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
+-
+-% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
+-\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
+-\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
+-
+-% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
+-\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
+-\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
+-
+-% we only have subsub.
+-\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
+-%
+-% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
+-% To achive this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
+-\chardef\unmlevel = \maxseclevel
+-%
+-% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
+-% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
+-\def\chapheadtype{N}
+-
+-% Choose a heading macro
+-% #1 is heading type
+-% #2 is heading level
+-% #3 is text for heading
+-\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
+- % Compute the abs. sec. level:
+- \absseclevel=#2
+- \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
+- % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
+- \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
+- \absseclevel = 0
+- \else
+- \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
+- \absseclevel = 3
+- \fi
+- \fi
+- % The heading type:
+- \def\headtype{#1}%
+- \if \headtype U%
+- \ifnum \absseclevel < \unmlevel
+- \chardef\unmlevel = \absseclevel
+- \fi
+- \else
+- % Check for appendix sections:
+- \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
+- \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
+- \else
+- \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
+- \errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
+- \fi\fi
+- \fi
+- % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
+- \ifnum \absseclevel > \unmlevel
+- \def\headtype{U}%
+- \else
+- \chardef\unmlevel = 3
+- \fi
+- \fi
+- % Now print the heading:
+- \if \headtype U%
+- \ifcase\absseclevel
+- \unnumberedzzz{#3}%
+- \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
+- \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
+- \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+- \fi
+- \else
+- \if \headtype A%
+- \ifcase\absseclevel
+- \appendixzzz{#3}%
+- \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
+- \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
+- \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+- \fi
+- \else
+- \ifcase\absseclevel
+- \chapterzzz{#3}%
+- \or \seczzz{#3}%
+- \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
+- \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+- \fi
+- \fi
+- \fi
+- \suppressfirstparagraphindent
+-}
+-
+-% an interface:
+-\def\numhead{\genhead N}
+-\def\apphead{\genhead A}
+-\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
+-
+-% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered. Increment top-level counter, reset
+-% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
+-%
+-% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
+-% (e.g., figures), q.v. By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
+-\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
+-%
+-\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
+-\def\chapterzzz#1{%
+- % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
+- % as an @include file.
+- \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+- \global\advance\chapno by 1
+- %
+- % Used for \float.
+- \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
+- \resetallfloatnos
+- %
+- \message{\putwordChapter\space \the\chapno}%
+- %
+- % Write the actual heading.
+- \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
+- %
+- % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
+- \global\let\section = \numberedsec
+- \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+- \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+-}
+-
+-\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally apphead0 calls appendixzzz
+-\def\appendixzzz#1{%
+- \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+- \global\advance\appendixno by 1
+- \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
+- \resetallfloatnos
+- %
+- \def\appendixnum{\putwordAppendix\space \appendixletter}%
+- \message{\appendixnum}%
+- %
+- \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
+- %
+- \global\let\section = \appendixsec
+- \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
+- \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
+-}
+-
+-\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}} % normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz
+-\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
+- \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+- \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
+- %
+- % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
+- \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
+- \resetallfloatnos
+- %
+- % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
+- % argument to \message. Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
+- % expanded them. For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
+- % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
+- % to be executed, not expanded).
+- %
+- % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
+- % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself. We use
+- % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
+- % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>. (We also do this for
+- % the toc entries.)
+- \toks0 = {#1}%
+- \message{(\the\toks0)}%
+- %
+- \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
+- %
+- \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
+- \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
+- \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
+-}
+-
+-% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
+-\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
+- % Well, we could do the following in a group, but that would break
+- % an assumption that \chapmacro is called at the outermost level.
+- % Thus we are safer this way: --kasal, 24feb04
+- \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
+- \unnmhead0{#1}%
+- \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+-}
+-
+-% @top is like @unnumbered.
+-\let\top\unnumbered
+-
+-% Sections.
+-\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
+-\def\seczzz#1{%
+- \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
+- \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
+-}
+-
+-\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}} % normally calls appendixsectionzzz
+-\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
+- \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
+- \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
+-}
+-\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
+-
+-\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}} % normally calls unnumberedseczzz
+-\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
+- \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\secno by 1
+- \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
+-}
+-
+-% Subsections.
+-\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}} % normally calls numberedsubseczzz
+-\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
+- \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+- \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+-}
+-
+-\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}} % normally calls appendixsubseczzz
+-\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
+- \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+- \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
+- {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+-}
+-
+-\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}} %normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz
+-\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
+- \global\subsubsecno=0 \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+- \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
+- {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+-}
+-
+-% Subsubsections.
+-\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}} % normally numberedsubsubseczzz
+-\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
+- \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+- \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
+- {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+-}
+-
+-\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}} % normally appendixsubsubseczzz
+-\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
+- \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+- \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
+- {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+-}
+-
+-\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}} %normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz
+-\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
+- \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+- \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
+- {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+-}
+-
+-% These macros control what the section commands do, according
+-% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
+-% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
+-\let\section = \numberedsec
+-\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+-\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+-
+-% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
+-
+-% NOTE on use of \vbox for chapter headings, section headings, and such:
+-% 1) We use \vbox rather than the earlier \line to permit
+-% overlong headings to fold.
+-% 2) \hyphenpenalty is set to 10000 because hyphenation in a
+-% heading is obnoxious; this forbids it.
+-% 3) Likewise, headings look best if no \parindent is used, and
+-% if justification is not attempted. Hence \raggedright.
+-
+-
+-\def\majorheading{%
+- {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
+- \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
+-}
+-
+-\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
+-\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
+- {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+- \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+- \rm #1\hfill}}%
+- \bigskip \par\penalty 200\relax
+- \suppressfirstparagraphindent
+-}
+-
+-% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
+-\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+- \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+-\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+- \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+-\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+- \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+-
+-% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
+-% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
+-% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
+-
+-%%% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
+-\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
+-
+-%%% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it
+-% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
+-
+-\newskip\chapheadingskip
+-
+-\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
+-\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
+-% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
+-% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong. But we don't
+-% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
+-\def\chapoddpage{%
+- \chappager
+- \ifodd\pageno \else
+- \begingroup
+- \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
+- \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
+- \hbox to 0pt{}%
+- \chappager
+- \endgroup
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-\def\setchapternewpage #1 {\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
+-
+-\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
+-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+-\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
+-\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
+-
+-\def\CHAPPAGon{%
+-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+-\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
+-\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
+-\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
+-
+-\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
+-\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+-\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
+-\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
+-\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
+-
+-\CHAPPAGon
+-
+-% Chapter opening.
+-%
+-% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
+-% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
+-%
+-% To test against our argument.
+-\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
+-\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
+-\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
+-%
+-\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
+- % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
+- \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
+- \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
+- \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
+- \gdef\thissection{}}%
+- %
+- \def\temptype{#2}%
+- \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+- \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
+- \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
+- \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+- \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
+- \gdef\thischapter{}}%
+- \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+- \toks0={#1}%
+- \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
+- \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
+- \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
+- \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordAppendix{} \noexpand\thischapternum:
+- \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+- }%
+- \else
+- \toks0={#1}%
+- \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
+- \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
+- \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
+- \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\putwordChapter{} \noexpand\thischapternum:
+- \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+- }%
+- \fi\fi\fi
+- %
+- % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
+- % the preceding space.
+- \safewhatsit\domark
+- %
+- % Insert the chapter heading break.
+- \pchapsepmacro
+- %
+- % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
+- % between here and the heading.
+- \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
+- \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
+- \domark
+- %
+- {%
+- \chapfonts \rm
+- %
+- % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
+- % xref code eventually uses it. On the other hand, it has to be called
+- % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
+- \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
+- %
+- % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
+- % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
+- \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+- \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+- \def\toctype{unnchap}%
+- \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+- \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
+- \def\toctype{omit}%
+- \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+- \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
+- \def\toctype{app}%
+- \else
+- \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
+- \def\toctype{numchap}%
+- \fi\fi\fi
+- %
+- % Write the toc entry for this chapter. Must come before the
+- % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
+- % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
+- \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
+- %
+- % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
+- % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
+- % been typeset. If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
+- % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
+- % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
+- \donoderef{#2}%
+- %
+- % Typeset the actual heading.
+- \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
+- \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+- \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
+- \unhbox0 #1\par}%
+- }%
+- \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
+- \nobreak
+-}
+-
+-% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
+-\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+-\def\centerparameters{%
+- \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
+- \leftskip = \rightskip
+- \parfillskip = 0pt
+-}
+-
+-
+-% I don't think this chapter style is supported any more, so I'm not
+-% updating it with the new noderef stuff. We'll see. --karl, 11aug03.
+-%
+-\def\setchapterstyle #1 {\csname CHAPF#1\endcsname}
+-%
+-\def\unnchfopen #1{%
+-\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+- \parindent=0pt\raggedright
+- \rm #1\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+-}
+-\def\chfopen #1#2{\chapoddpage {\chapfonts
+-\vbox to 3in{\vfil \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #2} \hbox to\hsize{\hfil #1} \vfil}}%
+-\par\penalty 5000 %
+-}
+-\def\centerchfopen #1{%
+-\chapoddpage {\chapfonts \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000\tolerance=5000
+- \parindent=0pt
+- \hfill {\rm #1}\hfill}}\bigskip \par\nobreak
+-}
+-\def\CHAPFopen{%
+- \global\let\chapmacro=\chfopen
+- \global\let\centerchapmacro=\centerchfopen}
+-
+-
+-% Section titles. These macros combine the section number parts and
+-% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
+-%
+-\newskip\secheadingskip
+-\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
+-
+-% Subsection titles.
+-\newskip\subsecheadingskip
+-\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
+-
+-% Subsubsection titles.
+-\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
+-\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
+-
+-
+-% Print any size, any type, section title.
+-%
+-% #1 is the text, #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec), #3 is
+-% the section type for xrefs (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix), #4 is the
+-% section number.
+-%
+-\def\seckeyword{sec}
+-%
+-\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
+- {%
+- % Switch to the right set of fonts.
+- \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm
+- %
+- \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
+- \def\temptype{#3}%
+- %
+- % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
+- \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
+- \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+- \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
+- \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
+- \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
+- \fi
+- \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+- % Don't redefine \thissection.
+- \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+- \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
+- \toks0={#1}%
+- \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
+- \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
+- \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
+- \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum:
+- \noexpand\thissectionname}%
+- }%
+- \fi
+- \else
+- \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
+- \toks0={#1}%
+- \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
+- \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
+- \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
+- \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\putwordSection{} \noexpand\thissectionnum:
+- \noexpand\thissectionname}%
+- }%
+- \fi
+- \fi\fi\fi
+- %
+- % Output the mark. Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
+- % the preceding space.
+- \safewhatsit\domark
+- %
+- % Insert space above the heading.
+- \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
+- %
+- % Now the second mark, after the heading break. No break points
+- % between here and the heading.
+- \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
+- \domark
+- %
+- % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
+- \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+- \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+- \def\toctype{unn}%
+- \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
+- \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+- % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
+- % and don't redefine \lastsection.
+- \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+- \def\toctype{omit}%
+- \let\sectionlevel=\empty
+- \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+- \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
+- \def\toctype{app}%
+- \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
+- \else
+- \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
+- \def\toctype{num}%
+- \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
+- \fi\fi\fi
+- %
+- % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef). See comments in \chapmacro.
+- \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
+- %
+- % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
+- % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
+- \donoderef{#3}%
+- %
+- % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
+- % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
+- % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
+- % \writetocentry if there was no node). We don't want to allow that
+- % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
+- % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong. Debian bug 276000.
+- \nobreak
+- %
+- % Output the actual section heading.
+- \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \raggedright
+- \hangindent=\wd0 % zero if no section number
+- \unhbox0 #1}%
+- }%
+- % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
+- % Don't allow stretch, though.
+- \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
+- %
+- % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
+- % was followed by glue.
+- \nobreak
+- %
+- % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
+- % glue accumulate. (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
+- % discardable item.)
+- \vskip-\parskip
+- %
+- % This is purely so the last item on the list is a known \penalty >
+- % 10000. This is so \startdefun can avoid allowing breakpoints after
+- % section headings. Otherwise, it would insert a valid breakpoint between:
+- %
+- % @section sec-whatever
+- % @deffn def-whatever
+- \penalty 10001
+-}
+-
+-
+-\message{toc,}
+-% Table of contents.
+-\newwrite\tocfile
+-
+-% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
+-% Called from @chapter, etc.
+-%
+-% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
+-% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
+-% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
+-% read this. The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
+-% destination to jump to.
+-%
+-% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
+-% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
+-% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything. This is used for the
+-% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
+-%
+-\newif\iftocfileopened
+-\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
+-%
+-\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
+- \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
+- \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
+- \iftocfileopened\else
+- \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
+- \global\tocfileopenedtrue
+- \fi
+- %
+- \iflinks
+- {\atdummies
+- \edef\temp{%
+- \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+- \temp
+- }%
+- \fi
+- \fi
+- %
+- % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
+- % writing pdf. These are used in the table of contents. We can't
+- % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
+- % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
+- % two pages of the document. Thus, we'd have two destinations named
+- % `1', and two named `2'.
+- \ifpdf \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue \fi
+-}
+-
+-
+-% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
+-% fonts, so we must take special care. This is more or less redundant
+-% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
+-%
+-\def\activecatcodes{%
+- \catcode`\"=\active
+- \catcode`\$=\active
+- \catcode`\<=\active
+- \catcode`\>=\active
+- \catcode`\\=\active
+- \catcode`\^=\active
+- \catcode`\_=\active
+- \catcode`\|=\active
+- \catcode`\~=\active
+-}
+-
+-
+-% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
+-\def\readtocfile{%
+- \setupdatafile
+- \activecatcodes
+- \input \tocreadfilename
+-}
+-
+-\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
+-\newcount\savepageno
+-\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
+-
+-% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
+-%
+-\def\startcontents#1{%
+- % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
+- % start on an odd page, unlike chapters. Thus, we maintain
+- % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
+- % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege at matematik.su.se>
+- \contentsalignmacro
+- \immediate\closeout\tocfile
+- %
+- % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
+- % It is abundantly clear what they are.
+- \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
+- %
+- \savepageno = \pageno
+- \begingroup % Set up to handle contents files properly.
+- \raggedbottom % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
+- \advance\hsize by -\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+- %
+- % Roman numerals for page numbers.
+- \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
+-}
+-
+-% redefined for the two-volume lispref. We always output on
+-% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
+-%
+-\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
+-
+-% Normal (long) toc.
+-%
+-\def\contents{%
+- \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
+- \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
+- \ifeof 1 \else
+- \readtocfile
+- \fi
+- \vfill \eject
+- \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+- \ifeof 1 \else
+- \pdfmakeoutlines
+- \fi
+- \closein 1
+- \endgroup
+- \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+- \global\pageno = \savepageno
+-}
+-
+-% And just the chapters.
+-\def\summarycontents{%
+- \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
+- %
+- \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
+- \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
+- \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
+- % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
+- \secfonts
+- \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
+- \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
+- \rm
+- \hyphenpenalty = 10000
+- \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
+- \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
+- \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
+- \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
+- \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+- \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+- \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+- \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+- \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+- \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+- \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
+- \ifeof 1 \else
+- \readtocfile
+- \fi
+- \closein 1
+- \vfill \eject
+- \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+- \endgroup
+- \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+- \global\pageno = \savepageno
+-}
+-\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
+-
+-% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
+-% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
+-%
+-\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
+- % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
+- % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
+- % But use \hss just in case.
+- % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
+- % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
+- %
+- % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
+- % with appendix letters. And right-justifying numbers and
+- % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
+- % chapters. Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
+- % there are before deciding ...
+- \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
+-}
+-
+-% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
+-% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
+-% The last argument is the page number.
+-% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
+-
+-% Chapters, in the main contents.
+-\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+-%
+-% Chapters, in the short toc.
+-% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
+-\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
+- \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
+-}
+-
+-% Appendices, in the main contents.
+-% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
+-%
+-\def\appendixbox#1{%
+- % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
+- \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
+- \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
+-%
+-\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+-
+-% Unnumbered chapters.
+-\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
+-\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
+-
+-% Sections.
+-\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+-\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
+-\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
+-
+-% Subsections.
+-\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+-\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
+-\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
+-
+-% And subsubsections.
+-\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+-\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
+-\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
+-
+-% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
+-% Same as \defaultparindent.
+-\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
+-
+-% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
+-% page number.
+-%
+-% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
+-% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
+-\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
+- \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
+- \begingroup
+- \chapentryfonts
+- \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+- \endgroup
+- \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
+-}
+-
+-\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+- \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
+- \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+-\endgroup}
+-
+-\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+- \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
+- \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+-\endgroup}
+-
+-\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+- \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
+- \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+-\endgroup}
+-
+-% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
+-\let\tocentry = \entry
+-
+-% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
+-\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
+-
+-\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+-\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+-
+-\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
+-\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
+-\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
+-\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
+-
+-
+-\message{environments,}
+-% @foo ... @end foo.
+-
+-% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
+-%
+-% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
+-% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
+-%
+-\def\point{$\star$}
+-\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
+-\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
+-\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
+-\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
+-\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
+-
+-% The @error{} command.
+-% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
+-%
+-\newbox\errorbox
+-%
+-{\tentt \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
+-\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
+-% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
+-\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf error\kern-1.5pt}
+-%
+-\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
+- \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
+- \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
+- \vbox{%
+- \hrule height\dimen2
+- \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt % Space to left of text.
+- \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
+- \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
+- \hrule height\dimen2}
+- \hfil}
+-%
+-\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
+-
+-% @tex ... @end tex escapes into raw Tex temporarily.
+-% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
+-% But \@ or @@ will get a plain tex @ character.
+-
+-\envdef\tex{%
+- \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
+- \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
+- \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
+- \catcode `\%=14
+- \catcode `\+=\other
+- \catcode `\"=\other
+- \catcode `\|=\other
+- \catcode `\<=\other
+- \catcode `\>=\other
+- \escapechar=`\\
+- %
+- \let\b=\ptexb
+- \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
+- \let\c=\ptexc
+- \let\,=\ptexcomma
+- \let\.=\ptexdot
+- \let\dots=\ptexdots
+- \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
+- \let\!=\ptexexclam
+- \let\i=\ptexi
+- \let\indent=\ptexindent
+- \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
+- \let\{=\ptexlbrace
+- \let\+=\tabalign
+- \let\}=\ptexrbrace
+- \let\/=\ptexslash
+- \let\*=\ptexstar
+- \let\t=\ptext
+- \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop % outer
+- \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
+- %
+- \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
+- \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
+- \def\@{@}%
+-}
+-% There is no need to define \Etex.
+-
+-% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
+-% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
+-% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
+-
+-% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
+-\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
+-
+-% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
+-% such environments. \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
+-% have any width.
+-\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
+-
+-% This space is always present above and below environments.
+-\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
+-
+-% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical. We use \parskip here
+-% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
+-% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
+-% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
+-%
+-\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
+- % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
+- % \sectionheading, q.v.
+- \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
+- \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
+- \endgraf
+- \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
+- \removelastskip
+- % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
+- % or better ...
+- \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
+- \vskip\envskipamount
+- \fi
+- \fi
+-}}
+-
+-\let\afterenvbreak = \aboveenvbreak
+-
+-% \nonarrowing is a flag. If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
+-% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
+-\let\nonarrowing=\relax
+-
+-% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
+-% environment contents.
+-\font\circle=lcircle10
+-\newdimen\circthick
+-\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
+-\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
+-\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
+-%
+-\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
+-\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
+-\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
+-\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
+-\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+- \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
+- \hskip\rskip}}
+-\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+- \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
+- \hskip\rskip}}
+-%
+-\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
+-
+-\envdef\cartouche{%
+- \ifhmode\par\fi % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
+- \startsavinginserts
+- \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
+- \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
+- \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
+- \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
+- \cartouter=\hsize
+- \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt % allow for 3pt kerns on either
+- % side, and for 6pt waste from
+- % each corner char, and rule thickness
+- \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
+- % Flag to tell @lisp, etc., not to narrow margin.
+- \let\nonarrowing = t%
+- \vbox\bgroup
+- \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
+- \carttop
+- \hbox\bgroup
+- \hskip\lskip
+- \vrule\kern3pt
+- \vbox\bgroup
+- \kern3pt
+- \hsize=\cartinner
+- \baselineskip=\normbskip
+- \lineskip=\normlskip
+- \parskip=\normpskip
+- \vskip -\parskip
+- \comment % For explanation, see the end of \def\group.
+-}
+-\def\Ecartouche{%
+- \ifhmode\par\fi
+- \kern3pt
+- \egroup
+- \kern3pt\vrule
+- \hskip\rskip
+- \egroup
+- \cartbot
+- \egroup
+- \checkinserts
+-}
+-
+-
+-% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
+-% inside a group.
+-\def\nonfillstart{%
+- \aboveenvbreak
+- \hfuzz = 12pt % Don't be fussy
+- \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
+- \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
+- \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
+- \parskip = 0pt
+- \parindent = 0pt
+- \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
+- \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+- \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+- \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
+- \else
+- \let\nonarrowing = \relax
+- \fi
+- \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
+-}
+-
+-% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
+-% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
+-% This affects the following displayed environments:
+-% @example, @display, @format, @lisp
+-%
+-\def\smallword{small}
+-\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
+-\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
+-\def\setnormaldispenv{%
+- \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
+- % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
+- % line. This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
+- % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
+- % to change the fonts afterward.
+- \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
+- \smallexamplefonts \rm
+- \fi
+-}
+-\def\setsmalldispenv{%
+- \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
+- \else
+- \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
+- \smallexamplefonts \rm
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
+-% Let's do it by one command:
+-\def\makedispenv #1#2{
+- \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}
+- \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}
+- \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
+- \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
+-}
+-
+-% Define two synonyms:
+-\def\maketwodispenvs #1#2#3{
+- \makedispenv{#1}{#3}
+- \makedispenv{#2}{#3}
+-}
+-
+-% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font; @example: same as @lisp.
+-%
+-% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
+-% Originally contributed by Pavel at xerox.
+-%
+-\maketwodispenvs {lisp}{example}{%
+- \nonfillstart
+- \tt\quoteexpand
+- \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
+- \gobble % eat return
+-}
+-% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
+-%
+-\makedispenv {display}{%
+- \nonfillstart
+- \gobble
+-}
+-
+-% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
+-%
+-\makedispenv{format}{%
+- \let\nonarrowing = t%
+- \nonfillstart
+- \gobble
+-}
+-
+-% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
+-\envdef\flushleft{%
+- \let\nonarrowing = t%
+- \nonfillstart
+- \gobble
+-}
+-\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
+-
+-% @flushright.
+-%
+-\envdef\flushright{%
+- \let\nonarrowing = t%
+- \nonfillstart
+- \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill
+- \gobble
+-}
+-\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
+-
+-
+-% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
+-% and narrows the margins. We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
+-% we're doing normal filling. So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
+-% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
+-%
+-\envdef\quotation{%
+- {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
+- \parindent=0pt
+- %
+- % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
+- \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+- \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+- \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
+- \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
+- \else
+- \let\nonarrowing = \relax
+- \fi
+- \parsearg\quotationlabel
+-}
+-
+-% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
+-% doing normal filling.
+-%
+-\def\Equotation{%
+- \par
+- \ifx\quotationauthor\undefined\else
+- % indent a bit.
+- \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
+- \fi
+- {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
+-}
+-
+-% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
+-\def\quotationlabel#1{%
+- \def\temp{#1}%
+- \ifx\temp\empty \else
+- {\bf #1: }%
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-
+-% LaTeX-like @verbatim... at end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
+-% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
+-% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
+-% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command. --janneke at gnu.org
+-%
+-% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996. The TeXbook.
+-%
+-% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
+-% active too. Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
+-% verbatim line.
+-\def\dospecials{%
+- \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
+- \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
+- \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
+-}
+-%
+-% [Knuth] p. 380
+-\def\uncatcodespecials{%
+- \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
+-%
+-% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
+-% Disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font
+-\begingroup
+- \catcode`\`=\active\gdef`{\relax\lq}
+-\endgroup
+-%
+-% Setup for the @verb command.
+-%
+-% Eight spaces for a tab
+-\begingroup
+- \catcode`\^^I=\active
+- \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
+-\endgroup
+-%
+-\def\setupverb{%
+- \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
+- \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
+- \catcode`\`=\active
+- \tabeightspaces
+- % Respect line breaks,
+- % print special symbols as themselves, and
+- % make each space count
+- % must do in this order:
+- \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
+-}
+-
+-% Setup for the @verbatim environment
+-%
+-% Real tab expansion
+-\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
+-%
+-\def\starttabbox{\setbox0=\hbox\bgroup}
+-
+-% Allow an option to not replace quotes with a regular directed right
+-% quote/apostrophe (char 0x27), but instead use the undirected quote
+-% from cmtt (char 0x0d). The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it
+-% the default, but it works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least
+-% evince), the lilypond developers report. xpdf does work with the
+-% regular 0x27.
+-%
+-\def\codequoteright{%
+- \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
+- \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
+- '%
+- \else \char'15 \fi
+- \else \char'15 \fi
+-}
+-%
+-% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
+-% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
+-% the code environments to do likewise.
+-%
+-\def\codequoteleft{%
+- \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
+- \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
+- `%
+- \else \char'22 \fi
+- \else \char'22 \fi
+-}
+-%
+-\begingroup
+- \catcode`\^^I=\active
+- \gdef\tabexpand{%
+- \catcode`\^^I=\active
+- \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
+- \dimen0=\wd0 % the width so far, or since the previous tab
+- \divide\dimen0 by\tabw
+- \multiply\dimen0 by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
+- \advance\dimen0 by\tabw % advance to next multiple of \tabw
+- \wd0=\dimen0 \box0 \starttabbox
+- }%
+- }
+- \catcode`\'=\active
+- \gdef\rquoteexpand{\catcode\rquoteChar=\active \def'{\codequoteright}}%
+- %
+- \catcode`\`=\active
+- \gdef\lquoteexpand{\catcode\lquoteChar=\active \def`{\codequoteleft}}%
+- %
+- \gdef\quoteexpand{\rquoteexpand \lquoteexpand}%
+-\endgroup
+-
+-% start the verbatim environment.
+-\def\setupverbatim{%
+- \let\nonarrowing = t%
+- \nonfillstart
+- % Easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
+- \tt
+- \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box0\endgraf}%
+- \catcode`\`=\active
+- \tabexpand
+- \quoteexpand
+- % Respect line breaks,
+- % print special symbols as themselves, and
+- % make each space count
+- % must do in this order:
+- \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
+- \everypar{\starttabbox}%
+-}
+-
+-% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
+-% delimiter characters. Before first delimiter expect a
+-% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
+-%
+-% \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
+-%
+-% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
+-\begingroup
+- \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
+- \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
+-\endgroup
+-%
+-\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
+-%
+-%
+-% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
+-% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
+-%
+-% \def\doverbatim#1 at end verbatim{#1}
+-%
+-% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
+-% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
+-% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
+-%
+-% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
+-%
+-\begingroup
+- \catcode`\ =\active
+- \obeylines %
+- % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
+- % of the @verbatim input line itself. Otherwise we get an extra blank
+- % line in the output.
+- \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2 at end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
+- % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
+- % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
+-\endgroup
+-%
+-\envdef\verbatim{%
+- \setupverbatim\doverbatim
+-}
+-\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
+-
+-
+-% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
+-%
+-\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
+-%
+-\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
+- {%
+- \makevalueexpandable
+- \setupverbatim
+- \indexnofonts % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
+- \input #1
+- \afterenvbreak
+- }%
+-}
+-
+-% @copying ... @end copying.
+-% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
+-%
+-% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
+-% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
+-% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
+-% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
+-% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
+-% possible is very desirable.
+-%
+-\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
+-\def\docopying#1 at end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
+-%
+-\def\insertcopying{%
+- \begingroup
+- \parindent = 0pt % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
+- \scanexp\copyingtext
+- \endgroup
+-}
+-
+-
+-\message{defuns,}
+-% @defun etc.
+-
+-\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
+-\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
+-\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
+-\newcount\defunpenalty
+-
+-% Start the processing of @deffn:
+-\def\startdefun{%
+- \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
+- \medbreak
+- \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
+- % following @def command, see below.
+- \else
+- % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
+- % which is there to keep the function description together with its
+- % header. But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
+- % break somewhere. Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
+- % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
+- % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
+- % a break between a section heading and a defun.
+- %
+- % As a minor refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
+- % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
+- % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
+- % @def command.
+- \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
+- %
+- % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
+- % But do insert the glue.
+- \medskip % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
+- \fi
+- %
+- \parindent=0in
+- \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+- \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+-}
+-
+-\def\dodefunx#1{%
+- % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
+- \checkenv#1%
+- %
+- % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
+- % It's not a great place, though.
+- \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
+- %
+- % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
+- \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
+-}
+-\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
+-
+-% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
+-%
+-\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
+- \begingroup
+- % call \deffnheader:
+- #1#2 \endheader
+- % common ending:
+- \interlinepenalty = 10000
+- \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+- \endgraf
+- \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
+- \penalty\defunpenalty % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
+- % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
+- % rendering the following check redundant. But we don't optimize.
+- \checkparencounts
+- \endgroup
+-}
+-
+-\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
+-
+-% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
+-% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
+-%
+-\def\makedefun#1{%
+- \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
+- \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
+- \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
+- \temp
+-}
+-
+-% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader
+-%
+-% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
+-% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
+-%
+-\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
+- \envdef#1{%
+- \startdefun
+- \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
+- }%
+- \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
+- \def#3%
+-}
+-
+-%%% Untyped functions:
+-
+-% @deffn category name args
+-\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
+-
+-% @deffn category class name args
+-\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
+-
+-% \defopon {category on}class name args
+-\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
+-
+-% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
+-%
+-\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
+- % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
+- \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
+- \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
+-}
+-
+-%%% Typed functions:
+-
+-% @deftypefn category type name args
+-\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
+-
+-% @deftypeop category class type name args
+-\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
+-
+-% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
+-\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
+-
+-% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
+-%
+-\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
+- \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
+- \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
+-}
+-
+-%%% Typed variables:
+-
+-% @deftypevr category type var args
+-\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
+-
+-% @deftypecv category class type var args
+-\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
+-
+-% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
+-\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
+-
+-% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
+-%
+-\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
+- \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
+- \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
+-}
+-
+-%%% Untyped variables:
+-
+-% @defvr category var args
+-\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
+-
+-% @defcv category class var args
+-\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
+-
+-% \defcvof {category of}class var args
+-\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
+-
+-%%% Type:
+-% @deftp category name args
+-\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
+- \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
+- \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
+-}
+-
+-% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
+-\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
+-\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
+-\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
+-\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
+-\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
+-\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
+-\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
+-\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
+-\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
+-\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
+-\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
+-
+-% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
+-% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
+-% #2 is the return type, if any.
+-% #3 is the function name.
+-%
+-% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
+-%
+-\def\defname#1#2#3{%
+- % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
+- \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+- %
+- % How we'll format the type name. Putting it in brackets helps
+- % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
+- % just below it.
+- \def\temp{#1}%
+- \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
+- %
+- % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.
+- % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
+- % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
+- \dimen0=\hsize \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0 \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
+- % The continuations:
+- \dimen2=\hsize \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
+- % (plain.tex says that \dimen1 should be used only as global.)
+- \parshape 2 0in \dimen0 \defargsindent \dimen2
+- %
+- % Put the type name to the right margin.
+- \noindent
+- \hbox to 0pt{%
+- \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
+- % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
+- \kern\leftskip
+- % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
+- }%
+- %
+- % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
+- \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
+- \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+- {%
+- % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
+- % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
+- % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
+- % common to leave accents off identifiers. The result looks ok in
+- % tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
+- % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
+- % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
+- % one has made identifiers using them :).
+- \df \tt
+- \def\temp{#2}% return value type
+- \ifx\temp\empty\else \tclose{\temp} \fi
+- #3% output function name
+- }%
+- {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \tenrm
+- %
+- \boldbrax
+- % arguments will be output next, if any.
+-}
+-
+-% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
+-% tt for the name. This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
+-% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
+-% distinguishable. Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
+-%
+-\def\defunargs#1{%
+- % use sl by default (not ttsl),
+- % tt for the names.
+- \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
+- %
+- % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
+- % want a way to get ttsl. Let's try @var for that.
+- \let\var=\ttslanted
+- #1%
+- \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
+-}
+-
+-% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
+-%
+-\def\activeparens{%
+- \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
+- \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
+- \catcode`\&=\active
+-}
+-
+-% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
+-\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
+-
+-% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc. For example,
+-% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
+-% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
+-{
+- \activeparens
+- \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
+- \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
+- \global\let& = \&
+-
+- \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
+- \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
+-}
+-
+-\newcount\parencount
+-
+-% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
+-\newif\ifampseen
+-\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\ }}
+-
+-\def\parenfont{%
+- \ifampseen
+- % At the first level, print parens in roman,
+- % otherwise use the default font.
+- \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
+- \else
+- % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
+- % the contained text. This is especially needed for [ and ] .
+- \sf
+- \fi
+-}
+-\def\infirstlevel#1{%
+- \ifampseen
+- \ifnum\parencount=1
+- #1%
+- \fi
+- \fi
+-}
+-\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
+-
+-\def\opnr{%
+- \global\advance\parencount by 1
+- {\parenfont(}%
+- \infirstlevel \bfafterword
+-}
+-\def\clnr{%
+- {\parenfont)}%
+- \infirstlevel \sl
+- \global\advance\parencount by -1
+-}
+-
+-\newcount\brackcount
+-\def\lbrb{%
+- \global\advance\brackcount by 1
+- {\bf[}%
+-}
+-\def\rbrb{%
+- {\bf]}%
+- \global\advance\brackcount by -1
+-}
+-
+-\def\checkparencounts{%
+- \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
+- \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
+-}
+-% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
+-% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
+-\def\badparencount{%
+- \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
+- \global\parencount=0
+-}
+-\def\badbrackcount{%
+- \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
+- \global\brackcount=0
+-}
+-
+-
+-\message{macros,}
+-% @macro.
+-
+-% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
+-% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
+-\ifx\eTeXversion\undefined
+- \newwrite\macscribble
+- \def\scantokens#1{%
+- \toks0={#1}%
+- \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
+- \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
+- \immediate\closeout\macscribble
+- \input \jobname.tmp
+- }
+-\fi
+-
+-\def\scanmacro#1{%
+- \begingroup
+- \newlinechar`\^^M
+- \let\xeatspaces\eatspaces
+- % Undo catcode changes of \startcontents and \doprintindex
+- % When called from @insertcopying or (short)caption, we need active
+- % backslash to get it printed correctly. Previously, we had
+- % \catcode`\\=\other instead. We'll see whether a problem appears
+- % with macro expansion. --kasal, 19aug04
+- \catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active \escapechar=`\@
+- % ... and \example
+- \spaceisspace
+- %
+- % Append \endinput to make sure that TeX does not see the ending newline.
+- % I've verified that it is necessary both for e-TeX and for ordinary TeX
+- % --kasal, 29nov03
+- \scantokens{#1\endinput}%
+- \endgroup
+-}
+-
+-\def\scanexp#1{%
+- \edef\temp{\noexpand\scanmacro{#1}}%
+- \temp
+-}
+-
+-\newcount\paramno % Count of parameters
+-\newtoks\macname % Macro name
+-\newif\ifrecursive % Is it recursive?
+-
+-% List of all defined macros in the form
+-% \definedummyword\macro1\definedummyword\macro2...
+-% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
+-% if there is a need.
+-\def\macrolist{}
+-
+-% Add the macro to \macrolist
+-\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
+-\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
+- \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\definedummyword#1}%
+- \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
+-}
+-
+-% Utility routines.
+-% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
+-% \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
+-% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
+-%
+-\def\cslet#1#2{%
+- \expandafter\let
+- \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
+- \csname#2\endcsname
+-}
+-
+-% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
+-% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
+-{\catcode`\@=11
+-\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
+-\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
+-\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
+-\def\unbrace#1{#1}
+-\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
+-}
+-
+-% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
+-{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
+-\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
+-\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
+-\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
+-}
+-
+-% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
+-% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
+-% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \.
+-
+-% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
+-% them to avoid their expansion. Must do this non-globally, to
+-% confine the change to the current group.
+-
+-% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
+-% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
+-% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
+-
+-\def\scanctxt{%
+- \catcode`\"=\other
+- \catcode`\+=\other
+- \catcode`\<=\other
+- \catcode`\>=\other
+- \catcode`\@=\other
+- \catcode`\^=\other
+- \catcode`\_=\other
+- \catcode`\|=\other
+- \catcode`\~=\other
+- \ifx\declaredencoding\ascii \else \setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal\other \fi
+-}
+-
+-\def\scanargctxt{%
+- \scanctxt
+- \catcode`\\=\other
+- \catcode`\^^M=\other
+-}
+-
+-\def\macrobodyctxt{%
+- \scanctxt
+- \catcode`\{=\other
+- \catcode`\}=\other
+- \catcode`\^^M=\other
+- \usembodybackslash
+-}
+-
+-\def\macroargctxt{%
+- \scanctxt
+- \catcode`\\=\other
+-}
+-
+-% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
+-% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
+-% where N is the macro parameter number.
+-% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
+-% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
+-
+-{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
+- @gdef at usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
+- @gdef at mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1 at endcsname}
+-}
+-\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
+-
+-\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
+-\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
+-
+-\def\macroxxx#1{%
+- \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
+- \ifx\argl\empty % no arguments
+- \paramno=0%
+- \else
+- \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
+- \fi
+- \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
+- \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
+- \else
+- \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
+- \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
+- \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
+- \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
+- \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
+- \fi
+- \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
+- \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
+- \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
+- \fi}
+-
+-\parseargdef\unmacro{%
+- \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
+- \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
+- \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
+- % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
+- \begingroup
+- \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
+- \let\definedummyword\unmacrodo
+- \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
+- \endgroup
+- \else
+- \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro. The idea is to omit any
+-% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
+-%
+-\def\unmacrodo#1{%
+- \ifx #1\relax
+- % remove this
+- \else
+- \noexpand\definedummyword \noexpand#1%
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-% This makes use of the obscure feature that if the last token of a
+-% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
+-% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
+-\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
+-\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
+-\def\getmacname #1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
+-\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
+-
+-% Parse the optional {params} list. Set up \paramno and \paramlist
+-% so \defmacro knows what to do. Define \macarg.blah for each blah
+-% in the params list, to be ##N where N is the position in that list.
+-% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
+-
+-% We need to get `macro parameter char #' into several definitions.
+-% The technique used is stolen from LaTeX: let \hash be something
+-% unexpandable, insert that wherever you need a #, and then redefine
+-% it to # just before using the token list produced.
+-%
+-% The same technique is used to protect \eatspaces till just before
+-% the macro is used.
+-
+-\def\parsemargdef#1;{\paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
+- \let\hash\relax\let\xeatspaces\relax\parsemargdefxxx#1,;,}
+-\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
+- \if#1;\let\next=\relax
+- \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
+- \advance\paramno by 1%
+- \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
+- {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
+- \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
+- \fi\next}
+-
+-% These two commands read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies.
+-% (They're different since rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
+-
+-\long\def\parsemacbody#1 at end macro%
+-{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+-\long\def\parsermacbody#1 at end rmacro%
+-{\xdef\temp{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}%
+-
+-% This defines the macro itself. There are six cases: recursive and
+-% nonrecursive macros of zero, one, and many arguments.
+-% Much magic with \expandafter here.
+-% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
+-% they're defined in; @include reads the file inside a group.
+-\def\defmacro{%
+- \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
+- \ifrecursive
+- \ifcase\paramno
+- % 0
+- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+- \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+- \or % 1
+- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+- \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+- \noexpand\braceorline
+- \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+- \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+- \else % many
+- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+- \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+- \noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
+- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+- \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+- \expandafter\expandafter
+- \expandafter\xdef
+- \expandafter\expandafter
+- \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+- \paramlist{\egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}}%
+- \fi
+- \else
+- \ifcase\paramno
+- % 0
+- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+- \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+- \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+- \or % 1
+- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+- \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+- \noexpand\braceorline
+- \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname}%
+- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname##1{%
+- \egroup
+- \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+- \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+- \else % many
+- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+- \bgroup\noexpand\macroargctxt
+- \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname}%
+- \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname xx\endcsname##1{%
+- \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname ##1,}%
+- \expandafter\expandafter
+- \expandafter\xdef
+- \expandafter\expandafter
+- \csname\the\macname xxx\endcsname
+- \paramlist{%
+- \egroup
+- \noexpand\norecurse{\the\macname}%
+- \noexpand\scanmacro{\temp}\egroup}%
+- \fi
+- \fi}
+-
+-\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
+-
+-% \braceorline decides whether the next nonwhitespace character is a
+-% {. If so it reads up to the closing }, if not, it reads the whole
+-% line. Whatever was read is then fed to the next control sequence
+-% as an argument (by \parsebrace or \parsearg)
+-\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
+-\def\braceorlinexxx{%
+- \ifx\nchar\bgroup\else
+- \expandafter\parsearg
+- \fi \macnamexxx}
+-
+-
+-% @alias.
+-% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
+-% sign. Just make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
+-\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
+-\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
+-\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
+- {%
+- \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
+- \addtomacrolist{#1}%
+- \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
+- }%
+- \next
+-}
+-
+-
+-\message{cross references,}
+-
+-\newwrite\auxfile
+-\newif\ifhavexrefs % True if xref values are known.
+-\newif\ifwarnedxrefs % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
+-
+-% @inforef is relatively simple.
+-\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
+-\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{\putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
+- node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
+-
+-% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
+-% cross-references. The @node line might or might not have commas, and
+-% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
+-% @node foo , bar , ...
+-% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
+-%
+-\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
+-%
+-% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
+-% @node Help-Cross, , , Cross-refs
+-\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
+-\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+-
+-\let\nwnode=\node
+-\let\lastnode=\empty
+-
+-% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node. #1 is the
+-% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
+-%
+-\def\donoderef#1{%
+- \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
+- \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
+- \global\let\lastnode=\empty
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
+-%
+-\newcount\savesfregister
+-%
+-\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
+-\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
+-\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
+-
+-% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
+-% anchor), which consists of three parts:
+-% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
+-% or the anchor name.
+-% 2) NAME-snt - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
+-% empty for anchors.
+-% 3) NAME-pg - the page number.
+-%
+-% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat. In the case of
+-% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
+-% 4) NAME-lof - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
+-%
+-\def\setref#1#2{%
+- \pdfmkdest{#1}%
+- \iflinks
+- {%
+- \atdummies % preserve commands, but don't expand them
+- \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
+- \write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
+- ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
+- }%
+- \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
+- \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
+- \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
+- \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, during \shipout
+- }%
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references. For \xrefX, #1 is
+-% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
+-% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
+-% manual. All but the node name can be omitted.
+-%
+-\def\pxref#1{\putwordsee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+-\def\xref#1{\putwordSee{} \xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+-\def\ref#1{\xrefX[#1,,,,,,,]}
+-\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
+- \unsepspaces
+- \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
+- \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
+- \setbox1=\hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
+- \setbox0=\hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
+- \ifdim \wd0 = 0pt
+- % No printed node name was explicitly given.
+- \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname\relax
+- % Use the node name inside the square brackets.
+- \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
+- \else
+- % Use the actual chapter/section title appear inside
+- % the square brackets. Use the real section title if we have it.
+- \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+- % It is in another manual, so we don't have it.
+- \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
+- \else
+- \ifhavexrefs
+- % We know the real title if we have the xref values.
+- \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
+- \else
+- % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
+- \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
+- \fi%
+- \fi
+- \fi
+- \fi
+- %
+- % Make link in pdf output.
+- \ifpdf
+- {\indexnofonts
+- \turnoffactive
+- % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
+- % etc. don't get their TeX definitions.
+- \getfilename{#4}%
+- %
+- % See comments at \activebackslashdouble.
+- {\activebackslashdouble \xdef\pdfxrefdest{#1}%
+- \backslashparens\pdfxrefdest}%
+- %
+- \leavevmode
+- \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+- \ifnum\filenamelength>0
+- goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfxrefdest}%
+- \else
+- goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfxrefdest}}%
+- \fi
+- }%
+- \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
+- \fi
+- %
+- % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
+- % instead of "[somenode], p.3". We distinguish them by the
+- % LABEL-title being set to a magic string.
+- {%
+- % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
+- % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
+- \indexnofonts
+- \turnoffactive
+- \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
+- \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
+- }%
+- \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
+- % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
+- % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
+- \ifdim\wd0 = 0pt
+- \refx{#1-snt}{}%
+- \else
+- \printedrefname
+- \fi
+- %
+- % if the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
+- % "in MANUALNAME".
+- \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+- \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+- \fi
+- \else
+- % node/anchor (non-float) references.
+- %
+- % If we use \unhbox0 and \unhbox1 to print the node names, TeX does not
+- % insert empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will
+- % not find a line break at a hyphen in a node names. Since some manuals
+- % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens, this
+- % is a loss. Therefore, we give the text of the node name again, so it
+- % is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+- \ifdim \wd1 > 0pt
+- \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+- \else
+- % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
+- % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
+- % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
+- % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
+- % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
+- {\turnoffactive
+- % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
+- % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
+- \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
+- \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
+- }%
+- % output the `[mynode]' via a macro so it can be overridden.
+- \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
+- %
+- % But we always want a comma and a space:
+- ,\space
+- %
+- % output the `page 3'.
+- \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+- \fi
+- \fi
+- \endlink
+-\endgroup}
+-
+-% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
+-% output. It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
+-% since square brackets don't work well in some documents. Particularly
+-% one that Bob is working on :).
+-%
+-\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
+-
+-% Things referred to by \setref.
+-%
+-\def\Ynothing{}
+-\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
+-\def\Ynumbered{%
+- \ifnum\secno=0
+- \putwordChapter at tie \the\chapno
+- \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+- \putwordSection at tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
+- \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+- \putwordSection at tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
+- \else
+- \putwordSection at tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+- \fi\fi\fi
+-}
+-\def\Yappendix{%
+- \ifnum\secno=0
+- \putwordAppendix at tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
+- \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+- \putwordSection at tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
+- \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+- \putwordSection at tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
+- \else
+- \putwordSection at tie
+- @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+- \fi\fi\fi
+-}
+-
+-% Define \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} to reference a cross-reference string named NAME.
+-% If its value is nonempty, SUFFIX is output afterward.
+-%
+-\def\refx#1#2{%
+- {%
+- \indexnofonts
+- \otherbackslash
+- \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
+- \csname XR#1\endcsname
+- }%
+- \ifx\thisrefX\relax
+- % If not defined, say something at least.
+- \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
+- \iflinks
+- \ifhavexrefs
+- \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `#1'.}%
+- \else
+- \ifwarnedxrefs\else
+- \global\warnedxrefstrue
+- \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
+- \fi
+- \fi
+- \fi
+- \else
+- % It's defined, so just use it.
+- \thisrefX
+- \fi
+- #2% Output the suffix in any case.
+-}
+-
+-% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file. Usually it's
+-% just a \def (we prepend XR to the control sequence name to avoid
+-% collisions). But if this is a float type, we have more work to do.
+-%
+-\def\xrdef#1#2{%
+- {% The node name might contain 8-bit characters, which in our current
+- % implementation are changed to commands like @'e. Don't let these
+- % mess up the control sequence name.
+- \indexnofonts
+- \turnoffactive
+- \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
+- }%
+- %
+- \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}% remember this xref
+- %
+- % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
+- \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
+- % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
+- \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
+- \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
+- %
+- % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
+- \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
+- \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
+- \else
+- % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
+- \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
+- \fi
+- %
+- % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
+- % for later use in \listoffloats.
+- \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
+- {\safexrefname}}%
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-% Read the last existing aux file, if any. No error if none exists.
+-%
+-\def\tryauxfile{%
+- \openin 1 \jobname.aux
+- \ifeof 1 \else
+- \readdatafile{aux}%
+- \global\havexrefstrue
+- \fi
+- \closein 1
+-}
+-
+-\def\setupdatafile{%
+- \catcode`\^^@=\other
+- \catcode`\^^A=\other
+- \catcode`\^^B=\other
+- \catcode`\^^C=\other
+- \catcode`\^^D=\other
+- \catcode`\^^E=\other
+- \catcode`\^^F=\other
+- \catcode`\^^G=\other
+- \catcode`\^^H=\other
+- \catcode`\^^K=\other
+- \catcode`\^^L=\other
+- \catcode`\^^N=\other
+- \catcode`\^^P=\other
+- \catcode`\^^Q=\other
+- \catcode`\^^R=\other
+- \catcode`\^^S=\other
+- \catcode`\^^T=\other
+- \catcode`\^^U=\other
+- \catcode`\^^V=\other
+- \catcode`\^^W=\other
+- \catcode`\^^X=\other
+- \catcode`\^^Z=\other
+- \catcode`\^^[=\other
+- \catcode`\^^\=\other
+- \catcode`\^^]=\other
+- \catcode`\^^^=\other
+- \catcode`\^^_=\other
+- % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
+- % in xref tags, i.e., node names. But since ^^e4 notation isn't
+- % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable. Furthermore,
+- % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
+- % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
+- % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
+- % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence. It could
+- % all be worked out, but why? Either we support ^^ or we don't.
+- %
+- % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
+- % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
+- % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
+- %
+- \catcode`\^=\other
+- %
+- % Special characters. Should be turned off anyway, but...
+- \catcode`\~=\other
+- \catcode`\[=\other
+- \catcode`\]=\other
+- \catcode`\"=\other
+- \catcode`\_=\other
+- \catcode`\|=\other
+- \catcode`\<=\other
+- \catcode`\>=\other
+- \catcode`\$=\other
+- \catcode`\#=\other
+- \catcode`\&=\other
+- \catcode`\%=\other
+- \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
+- %
+- % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
+- % characters end up in a \csname. It's easier than
+- % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
+- % character. What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
+- % of the xrdef. Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
+- % should not typeset properly. But it works, so I'm moving on for
+- % now. --karl, 15jan04.
+- \catcode`\\=\other
+- %
+- % Make the characters 128-255 be printing characters.
+- {%
+- \count1=128
+- \def\loop{%
+- \catcode\count1=\other
+- \advance\count1 by 1
+- \ifnum \count1<256 \loop \fi
+- }%
+- }%
+- %
+- % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
+- \catcode`\{=1
+- \catcode`\}=2
+- \catcode`\@=0
+-}
+-
+-\def\readdatafile#1{%
+-\begingroup
+- \setupdatafile
+- \input\jobname.#1
+-\endgroup}
+-
+-
+-\message{insertions,}
+-% including footnotes.
+-
+-\newcount \footnoteno
+-
+-% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
+-% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
+-% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
+-% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
+-% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
+-\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
+-
+-% @footnotestyle is meaningful for info output only.
+-\let\footnotestyle=\comment
+-
+-{\catcode `\@=11
+-%
+-% Auto-number footnotes. Otherwise like plain.
+-\gdef\footnote{%
+- \let\indent=\ptexindent
+- \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
+- \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
+- \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
+- %
+- % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
+- % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
+- \let\@sf\empty
+- \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
+- %
+- % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
+- \unskip
+- \thisfootno\@sf
+- \dofootnote
+-}%
+-
+-% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
+-% footnote text as a parameter. Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
+-%
+-% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
+-% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
+-% the footnote is read. --karl, 16nov96.
+-%
+-\gdef\dofootnote{%
+- \insert\footins\bgroup
+- % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
+- % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
+- % So reset some parameters.
+- \hsize=\pagewidth
+- \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+- \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
+- \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
+- \floatingpenalty\@MM
+- \leftskip\z at skip
+- \rightskip\z at skip
+- \spaceskip\z at skip
+- \xspaceskip\z at skip
+- \parindent\defaultparindent
+- %
+- \smallfonts \rm
+- %
+- % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
+- % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op. makeinfo does not use
+- % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
+- % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
+- \let\noindent = \relax
+- %
+- % Hang the footnote text off the number. Use \everypar in case the
+- % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
+- \everypar = {\hang}%
+- \textindent{\thisfootno}%
+- %
+- % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text. Since this
+- % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
+- % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
+- \footstrut
+- \futurelet\next\fo at t
+-}
+-}%end \catcode `\@=11
+-
+-% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
+-% the real \insert just after the vbox finished. Otherwise, the insertion
+-% would be lost.
+-% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
+-% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
+-% And the same can be done for other insert classes. --kasal, 16nov03.
+-
+-% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
+-% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
+-% out prematurely.
+-%
+-\def\startsavinginserts{%
+- \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
+- \let\insert\saveinsert
+- \else
+- \let\checkinserts\relax
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
+-% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
+-%
+-\def\saveinsert#1{%
+- \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
+- \afterassignment\next
+- % swallow the left brace
+- \let\temp =
+-}
+-\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
+-\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
+-
+-\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
+-
+-\def\placesaveins#1{%
+- \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
+- {\box#1}%
+-}
+-
+-% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
+-{
+- \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials % ;-)
+- \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
+-}
+-
+-% initialization:
+-\def\newsaveins #1{%
+- \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
+- \next
+-}
+-\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
+- \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
+- \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
+- \checksaveins #1}%
+-}
+-
+-% initialize:
+-\let\checkinserts\empty
+-\newsaveins\footins
+-\newsaveins\margin
+-
+-
+-% @image. We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
+-% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
+-%
+-% Check for and read epsf.tex up front. If we read it only at @image
+-% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
+-% undone and the next image would fail.
+-\openin 1 = epsf.tex
+-\ifeof 1 \else
+- % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
+- % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
+- \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
+- \input epsf.tex
+-\fi
+-\closein 1
+-%
+-% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
+-\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
+-\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
+- work. It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
+- it from ftp://tug.org/tex/epsf.tex.}
+-%
+-\def\image#1{%
+- \ifx\epsfbox\undefined
+- \ifwarnednoepsf \else
+- \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
+- \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
+- \global\warnednoepsftrue
+- \fi
+- \else
+- \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
+- \fi
+-}
+-%
+-% Arguments to @image:
+-% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
+-% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
+-% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
+-% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
+-% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing this stuff.
+-\newif\ifimagevmode
+-\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
+- \catcode`\^^M = 5 % in case we're inside an example
+- \normalturnoffactive % allow _ et al. in names
+- % If the image is by itself, center it.
+- \ifvmode
+- \imagevmodetrue
+- \nobreak\medskip
+- % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
+- % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
+- % above and below.
+- \nobreak\vskip\parskip
+- \nobreak
+- \fi
+- %
+- % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
+- % environment such as @quotation is respected. On the other hand, if
+- % it's at the top level, we don't want the normal paragraph indentation.
+- \noindent
+- %
+- % Output the image.
+- \ifpdf
+- \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+- \else
+- % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
+- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
+- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
+- \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
+- \fi
+- %
+- \ifimagevmode \medskip \fi % space after the standalone image
+-\endgroup}
+-
+-
+-% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
+-% etc. We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
+-% float "here". But it seemed the best name for the future.
+-%
+-\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
+-
+-% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
+-\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
+-
+-% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
+-% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc. Can't contain commas. If omitted,
+-% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
+-%
+-% #2 is the optional xref label. Also must be present for the float to
+-% be referable.
+-%
+-% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored. It
+-% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
+-%
+-% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
+-% chapter-level command.
+-\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
+-%
+-\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
+- \let\thiscaption=\empty
+- \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
+- %
+- % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
+- %
+- % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
+- % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
+- %
+- \startsavinginserts
+- %
+- % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
+- \par
+- %
+- \vtop\bgroup
+- \def\floattype{#1}%
+- \def\floatlabel{#2}%
+- \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
+- %
+- \ifx\floattype\empty
+- \let\safefloattype=\empty
+- \else
+- {%
+- % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
+- % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
+- \indexnofonts
+- \turnoffactive
+- \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
+- }%
+- \fi
+- %
+- % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
+- \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+- % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
+- % Table 1, Figure 2, ...). (And if no label, no number.)
+- %
+- \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
+- \global\advance\floatno by 1
+- %
+- {%
+- % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
+- % XREFLABEL-title value. \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
+- % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
+- % node and anchor labels. And \xrdef uses it to construct the
+- % lists of floats.
+- %
+- \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
+- \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
+- }%
+- \fi
+- %
+- % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
+- \vskip\parskip
+- %
+- % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
+- \restorefirstparagraphindent
+-}
+-
+-% we have these possibilities:
+-% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
+-% @float Foo,lbl & no caption: Foo 1.1
+-% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}: Foo: Cap
+-% @float Foo & no caption: Foo
+-% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}: 1.1: Cap
+-% @float ,lbl & no caption: 1.1
+-% @float & @caption{Cap}: Cap
+-% @float & no caption:
+-%
+-\def\Efloat{%
+- \let\floatident = \empty
+- %
+- % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
+- \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
+- %
+- % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
+- \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+- \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
+- \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
+- \fi
+- % the number.
+- \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
+- \fi
+- %
+- % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
+- % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
+- \let\captionline = \floatident
+- %
+- \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
+- \ifx\floatident\empty \else
+- \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
+- \fi
+- %
+- % caption text.
+- \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
+- \fi
+- %
+- % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
+- % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
+- \ifx\captionline\empty \else
+- \vskip.5\parskip
+- \captionline
+- %
+- % Space below caption.
+- \vskip\parskip
+- \fi
+- %
+- % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info. Do this
+- % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
+- \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+- % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
+- % \floatlabel-lof. Besides \floatident, we include the short
+- % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
+- {%
+- \atdummies
+- %
+- % since we read the caption text in the macro world, where ^^M
+- % is turned into a normal character, we have to scan it back, so
+- % we don't write the literal three characters "^^M" into the aux file.
+- \scanexp{%
+- \xdef\noexpand\gtemp{%
+- \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
+- \thiscaption
+- \else
+- \thisshortcaption
+- \fi
+- }%
+- }%
+- \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
+- \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
+- }%
+- \fi
+- \egroup % end of \vtop
+- %
+- % place the captured inserts
+- %
+- % BEWARE: when the floats start floating, we have to issue warning
+- % whenever an insert appears inside a float which could possibly
+- % float. --kasal, 26may04
+- %
+- \checkinserts
+-}
+-
+-% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
+-%
+-\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
+- \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
+-}
+-
+-% @caption, @shortcaption
+-%
+-\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
+-\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
+-\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
+-\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
+-
+-% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
+-% going to use. Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
+-\def\getfloatno#1{%
+- \ifx#1\relax
+- % Haven't seen this figure type before.
+- \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
+- %
+- % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
+- \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
+- \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
+- \fi
+- \let\floatno#1%
+-}
+-
+-% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value. We want an @xref
+-% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1". We call \setref when we
+-% first read the @float command.
+-%
+-\def\Yfloat{\floattype at tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
+-
+-% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
+-% distinguish floats from other xref types.
+-\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
+-
+-% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
+-% which is true if #1 represents a float ref. That is, the magic
+-% \lastsection value which we \setref above.
+-%
+-\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
+-%
+-% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string. If so, #2 will be the
+-% (safe) float type for this float. We set \iffloattype to #2.
+-%
+-\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
+- \def\temp{#1}%
+- \def\iffloattype{#2}%
+- \ifx\temp\floatmagic
+-}
+-
+-% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
+-%
+-\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
+- \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
+- {%
+- % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
+- % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
+- \indexnofonts
+- \turnoffactive
+- \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
+- }%
+- %
+- % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
+- \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
+- \ifhavexrefs
+- % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
+- \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
+- \fi
+- \else
+- \begingroup
+- \leftskip=\tocindent % indent these entries like a toc
+- \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
+- \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
+- \endgroup
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-% This is called on each entry in a list of floats. We're passed the
+-% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
+-% aux file. We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
+-% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
+-%
+-% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
+-% they won't appear in the aux file).
+-%
+-\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
+-\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
+- % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything. Just
+- % pass the control sequence. On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
+- % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
+- % in pdf output.
+- \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
+- %
+- % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
+- \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
+- \writeentry
+-}}
+-
+-
+-\message{localization,}
+-
+-% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
+-% early, just after @documentencoding. Single argument is the language
+-% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
+-%
+-{
+- \catcode`\_ = \active
+- \globaldefs=1
+-\parseargdef\documentlanguage{\begingroup
+- \let_=\normalunderscore % normal _ character for filenames
+- \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
+- % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
+- \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
+- \ifeof 1
+- \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore{#1_\finish}%
+- \else
+- \globaldefs = 1 % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
+- \input txi-#1.tex
+- \fi
+- \closein 1
+- \endgroup % end raw TeX
+-\endgroup}
+-}
+-%
+-% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
+-% try txi-de.tex.
+-%
+-\def\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
+- \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
+- \ifeof 1
+- \errhelp = \nolanghelp
+- \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
+- \else
+- \input txi-#1.tex
+- \fi
+- \closein 1
+-}
+-%
+-\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
+-is empty. Maybe you need to install it? Putting it in the current
+-directory should work if nowhere else does.}
+-
+-% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
+-% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
+-% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
+-%
+-% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
+-% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
+-% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
+-%
+-% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
+-% available languages. This means we can support hyphenation in
+-% Texinfo, at least to some extent. (This still doesn't solve the
+-% accented characters problem.)
+-%
+-\catcode`@=11
+-\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
+- % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
+- \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
+- \message{no patterns for #1}%
+- \else
+- \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
+- \fi
+- % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
+- \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
+- \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
+-}
+-
+-% Helpers for encodings.
+-% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
+-%
+-\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
+- \count255=128
+- \loop\ifnum\count255<256
+- \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
+- \advance\count255 by 1
+- \repeat
+-}
+-
+-\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
+- \count255=128
+- \loop\ifnum\count255<256
+- \catcode\count255=#1\relax
+- \advance\count255 by 1
+- \repeat
+-}
+-
+-% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
+-% according to the specified encoding.
+-%
+-\parseargdef\documentencoding{%
+- % Encoding being declared for the document.
+- \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
+- %
+- % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
+- % to compare them with \ifx.
+- \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
+- \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
+- \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
+- \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
+- \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
+- %
+- \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
+- \asciichardefs
+- %
+- \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
+- \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+- \lattwochardefs
+- %
+- \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
+- \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+- \latonechardefs
+- %
+- \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
+- \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+- \latninechardefs
+- %
+- \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
+- \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+- \utfeightchardefs
+- %
+- \else
+- \message{Unknown document encoding #1, ignoring.}%
+- %
+- \fi % utfeight
+- \fi % latnine
+- \fi % latone
+- \fi % lattwo
+- \fi % ascii
+-}
+-
+-% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
+-% the default font encoding (OT1).
+-%
+-\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing in OT1 encoding: #1.}}
+-
+-% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
+-\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
+-
+-% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
+-% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
+-% macros containing the character definitions.
+-\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+-%
+-% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
+-\def\latonechardefs{%
+- \gdef^^a0{~}
+- \gdef^^a1{\exclamdown}
+- \gdef^^a2{\missingcharmsg{CENT SIGN}}
+- \gdef^^a3{{\pounds}}
+- \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
+- \gdef^^a5{\missingcharmsg{YEN SIGN}}
+- \gdef^^a6{\missingcharmsg{BROKEN BAR}}
+- \gdef^^a7{\S}
+- \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
+- \gdef^^a9{\copyright}
+- \gdef^^aa{\ordf}
+- \gdef^^ab{\missingcharmsg{LEFT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK}}
+- \gdef^^ac{$\lnot$}
+- \gdef^^ad{\-}
+- \gdef^^ae{\registeredsymbol}
+- \gdef^^af{\={}}
+- %
+- \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
+- \gdef^^b1{$\pm$}
+- \gdef^^b2{$^2$}
+- \gdef^^b3{$^3$}
+- \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
+- \gdef^^b5{$\mu$}
+- \gdef^^b6{\P}
+- %
+- \gdef^^b7{$^.$}
+- \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
+- \gdef^^b9{$^1$}
+- \gdef^^ba{\ordm}
+- %
+- \gdef^^bb{\missingcharmsg{RIGHT-POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE QUOTATION MARK}}
+- \gdef^^bc{$1\over4$}
+- \gdef^^bd{$1\over2$}
+- \gdef^^be{$3\over4$}
+- \gdef^^bf{\questiondown}
+- %
+- \gdef^^c0{\`A}
+- \gdef^^c1{\'A}
+- \gdef^^c2{\^A}
+- \gdef^^c3{\~A}
+- \gdef^^c4{\"A}
+- \gdef^^c5{\ringaccent A}
+- \gdef^^c6{\AE}
+- \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
+- \gdef^^c8{\`E}
+- \gdef^^c9{\'E}
+- \gdef^^ca{\^E}
+- \gdef^^cb{\"E}
+- \gdef^^cc{\`I}
+- \gdef^^cd{\'I}
+- \gdef^^ce{\^I}
+- \gdef^^cf{\"I}
+- %
+- \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ETH}}
+- \gdef^^d1{\~N}
+- \gdef^^d2{\`O}
+- \gdef^^d3{\'O}
+- \gdef^^d4{\^O}
+- \gdef^^d5{\~O}
+- \gdef^^d6{\"O}
+- \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
+- \gdef^^d8{\O}
+- \gdef^^d9{\`U}
+- \gdef^^da{\'U}
+- \gdef^^db{\^U}
+- \gdef^^dc{\"U}
+- \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
+- \gdef^^de{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN}}
+- \gdef^^df{\ss}
+- %
+- \gdef^^e0{\`a}
+- \gdef^^e1{\'a}
+- \gdef^^e2{\^a}
+- \gdef^^e3{\~a}
+- \gdef^^e4{\"a}
+- \gdef^^e5{\ringaccent a}
+- \gdef^^e6{\ae}
+- \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
+- \gdef^^e8{\`e}
+- \gdef^^e9{\'e}
+- \gdef^^ea{\^e}
+- \gdef^^eb{\"e}
+- \gdef^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
+- \gdef^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
+- \gdef^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
+- \gdef^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
+- %
+- \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH}}
+- \gdef^^f1{\~n}
+- \gdef^^f2{\`o}
+- \gdef^^f3{\'o}
+- \gdef^^f4{\^o}
+- \gdef^^f5{\~o}
+- \gdef^^f6{\"o}
+- \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
+- \gdef^^f8{\o}
+- \gdef^^f9{\`u}
+- \gdef^^fa{\'u}
+- \gdef^^fb{\^u}
+- \gdef^^fc{\"u}
+- \gdef^^fd{\'y}
+- \gdef^^fe{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN}}
+- \gdef^^ff{\"y}
+-}
+-
+-% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
+-\def\latninechardefs{%
+- % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
+- \latonechardefs
+- %
+- \gdef^^a4{\euro}
+- \gdef^^a6{\v S}
+- \gdef^^a8{\v s}
+- \gdef^^b4{\v Z}
+- \gdef^^b8{\v z}
+- \gdef^^bc{\OE}
+- \gdef^^bd{\oe}
+- \gdef^^be{\"Y}
+-}
+-
+-% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
+-\def\lattwochardefs{%
+- \gdef^^a0{~}
+- \gdef^^a1{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH OGONEK}}
+- \gdef^^a2{\u{}}
+- \gdef^^a3{\L}
+- \gdef^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
+- \gdef^^a5{\v L}
+- \gdef^^a6{\'S}
+- \gdef^^a7{\S}
+- \gdef^^a8{\"{}}
+- \gdef^^a9{\v S}
+- \gdef^^aa{\cedilla S}
+- \gdef^^ab{\v T}
+- \gdef^^ac{\'Z}
+- \gdef^^ad{\-}
+- \gdef^^ae{\v Z}
+- \gdef^^af{\dotaccent Z}
+- %
+- \gdef^^b0{\textdegree}
+- \gdef^^b1{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH OGONEK}}
+- \gdef^^b2{\missingcharmsg{OGONEK}}
+- \gdef^^b3{\l}
+- \gdef^^b4{\'{}}
+- \gdef^^b5{\v l}
+- \gdef^^b6{\'s}
+- \gdef^^b7{\v{}}
+- \gdef^^b8{\cedilla\ }
+- \gdef^^b9{\v s}
+- \gdef^^ba{\cedilla s}
+- \gdef^^bb{\v t}
+- \gdef^^bc{\'z}
+- \gdef^^bd{\H{}}
+- \gdef^^be{\v z}
+- \gdef^^bf{\dotaccent z}
+- %
+- \gdef^^c0{\'R}
+- \gdef^^c1{\'A}
+- \gdef^^c2{\^A}
+- \gdef^^c3{\u A}
+- \gdef^^c4{\"A}
+- \gdef^^c5{\'L}
+- \gdef^^c6{\'C}
+- \gdef^^c7{\cedilla C}
+- \gdef^^c8{\v C}
+- \gdef^^c9{\'E}
+- \gdef^^ca{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH OGONEK}}
+- \gdef^^cb{\"E}
+- \gdef^^cc{\v E}
+- \gdef^^cd{\'I}
+- \gdef^^ce{\^I}
+- \gdef^^cf{\v D}
+- %
+- \gdef^^d0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D WITH STROKE}}
+- \gdef^^d1{\'N}
+- \gdef^^d2{\v N}
+- \gdef^^d3{\'O}
+- \gdef^^d4{\^O}
+- \gdef^^d5{\H O}
+- \gdef^^d6{\"O}
+- \gdef^^d7{$\times$}
+- \gdef^^d8{\v R}
+- \gdef^^d9{\ringaccent U}
+- \gdef^^da{\'U}
+- \gdef^^db{\H U}
+- \gdef^^dc{\"U}
+- \gdef^^dd{\'Y}
+- \gdef^^de{\cedilla T}
+- \gdef^^df{\ss}
+- %
+- \gdef^^e0{\'r}
+- \gdef^^e1{\'a}
+- \gdef^^e2{\^a}
+- \gdef^^e3{\u a}
+- \gdef^^e4{\"a}
+- \gdef^^e5{\'l}
+- \gdef^^e6{\'c}
+- \gdef^^e7{\cedilla c}
+- \gdef^^e8{\v c}
+- \gdef^^e9{\'e}
+- \gdef^^ea{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH OGONEK}}
+- \gdef^^eb{\"e}
+- \gdef^^ec{\v e}
+- \gdef^^ed{\'\i}
+- \gdef^^ee{\^\i}
+- \gdef^^ef{\v d}
+- %
+- \gdef^^f0{\missingcharmsg{LATIN SMALL LETTER D WITH STROKE}}
+- \gdef^^f1{\'n}
+- \gdef^^f2{\v n}
+- \gdef^^f3{\'o}
+- \gdef^^f4{\^o}
+- \gdef^^f5{\H o}
+- \gdef^^f6{\"o}
+- \gdef^^f7{$\div$}
+- \gdef^^f8{\v r}
+- \gdef^^f9{\ringaccent u}
+- \gdef^^fa{\'u}
+- \gdef^^fb{\H u}
+- \gdef^^fc{\"u}
+- \gdef^^fd{\'y}
+- \gdef^^fe{\cedilla t}
+- \gdef^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
+-}
+-
+-% UTF-8 character definitions.
+-%
+-% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
+-% changes for Texinfo conventions. It is included here under the GPL by
+-% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
+-%
+-\newcount\countUTFx
+-\newcount\countUTFy
+-\newcount\countUTFz
+-
+-\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
+- \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
+-%
+-\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
+- \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
+-%
+-\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
+- \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
+-
+-\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
+- \ifx #1\relax
+- \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
+- \else
+- \expandafter #1%
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-\begingroup
+- \catcode`\~13
+- \catcode`\"12
+-
+- \def\UTFviiiLoop{%
+- \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
+- \uccode`\~\countUTFx
+- \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
+- \advance\countUTFx by 1
+- \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
+- \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
+- \fi}
+-
+- \countUTFx = "C2
+- \countUTFy = "E0
+- \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
+- \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiTwoOctets\string~}}
+- \UTFviiiLoop
+-
+- \countUTFx = "E0
+- \countUTFy = "F0
+- \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
+- \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiThreeOctets\string~}}
+- \UTFviiiLoop
+-
+- \countUTFx = "F0
+- \countUTFy = "F4
+- \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
+- \xdef~{\noexpand\UTFviiiFourOctets\string~}}
+- \UTFviiiLoop
+-\endgroup
+-
+-\begingroup
+- \catcode`\"=12
+- \catcode`\<=12
+- \catcode`\.=12
+- \catcode`\,=12
+- \catcode`\;=12
+- \catcode`\!=12
+- \catcode`\~=13
+-
+- \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacter#1#2{%
+- \countUTFz = "#1\relax
+- \wlog{\space\space defining Unicode char U+#1 (decimal \the\countUTFz)}%
+- \begingroup
+- \parseXMLCharref
+- \def\UTFviiiTwoOctets##1##2{%
+- \csname u8:##1\string ##2\endcsname}%
+- \def\UTFviiiThreeOctets##1##2##3{%
+- \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\endcsname}%
+- \def\UTFviiiFourOctets##1##2##3##4{%
+- \csname u8:##1\string ##2\string ##3\string ##4\endcsname}%
+- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+- \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+- \gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
+- \endgroup}
+-
+- \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
+- \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
+- \errhelp = \EMsimple
+- \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
+- \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
+- \parseUTFviiiA,%
+- \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctets.,%
+- \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
+- \parseUTFviiiA;%
+- \parseUTFviiiA,%
+- \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctets.{,;}%
+- \else
+- \parseUTFviiiA;%
+- \parseUTFviiiA,%
+- \parseUTFviiiA!%
+- \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctets.{!,;}%
+- \fi\fi\fi
+- }
+-
+- \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
+- \countUTFx = \countUTFz
+- \divide\countUTFz by 64
+- \countUTFy = \countUTFz
+- \multiply\countUTFz by 64
+- \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
+- \advance\countUTFx by 128
+- \uccode `#1\countUTFx
+- \countUTFz = \countUTFy}
+-
+- \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
+- \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
+- \uccode `#3\countUTFz
+- \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
+-\endgroup
+-
+-\def\utfeightchardefs{%
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{t}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{T}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result}
+-
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\point}
+- \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv}
+-}% end of \utfeightchardefs
+-
+-
+-% US-ASCII character definitions.
+-\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
+- \relax
+-}
+-
+-% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
+-% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
+-% document encoding.
+-%
+-\setnonasciicharscatcode \other
+-
+-
+-\message{formatting,}
+-
+-\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
+-
+-\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
+-\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
+-\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+-
+-% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
+-\vbadness = 10000
+-
+-% Don't be so finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
+-\hbadness = 2000
+-
+-% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
+-\widowpenalty=10000
+-\clubpenalty=10000
+-
+-% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
+-% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything. We want the amount of
+-% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
+-% \hsize. We call this whenever the paper size is set.
+-%
+-\def\setemergencystretch{%
+- \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
+- % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
+- \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
+- \else
+- \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
+- \fi
+-}
+-
+-% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
+-% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
+-% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
+-%
+-% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
+-% \textleading. The caller should also set \parskip.
+-%
+-\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
+- \voffset = #3\relax
+- \topskip = #6\relax
+- \splittopskip = \topskip
+- %
+- \vsize = #1\relax
+- \advance\vsize by \topskip
+- \outervsize = \vsize
+- \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
+- \pageheight = \vsize
+- %
+- \hsize = #2\relax
+- \outerhsize = \hsize
+- \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
+- \pagewidth = \hsize
+- %
+- \normaloffset = #4\relax
+- \bindingoffset = #5\relax
+- %
+- \ifpdf
+- \pdfpageheight #7\relax
+- \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
+- % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
+- % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
+- \pdfhorigin = 1 true in
+- \pdfvorigin = 1 true in
+- \fi
+- %
+- \setleading{\textleading}
+- %
+- \parindent = \defaultparindent
+- \setemergencystretch
+-}
+-
+-% @letterpaper (the default).
+-\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+- \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+- \textleading = 13.2pt
+- %
+- % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
+- \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
+- {\voffset}{.25in}%
+- {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
+- {11in}{8.5in}%
+-}}
+-
+-% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
+-\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
+- \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
+- \textleading = 12pt
+- %
+- \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
+- {-.2in}{0in}%
+- {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
+- {9.25in}{7in}%
+- %
+- \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
+- \tolerance = 700
+- \hfuzz = 1pt
+- \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+- \defbodyindent = .5cm
+-}}
+-
+-% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
+-% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
+-\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
+- \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
+- \textleading = 12pt
+- %
+- \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
+- {-.2in}{-.4in}%
+- {0pt}{14pt}%
+- {9in}{6in}%
+- %
+- \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
+- \tolerance = 700
+- \hfuzz = 1pt
+- \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+- \defbodyindent = .4cm
+-}}
+-
+-% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
+-\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+- \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+- \textleading = 13.2pt
+- %
+- % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
+- % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
+- % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
+- % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align. Then
+- % do the same for \bindingoffset. You can set these for testing in
+- % your texinfo source file like this:
+- % @tex
+- % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
+- % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
+- % @end tex
+- \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
+- {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
+- {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+- {297mm}{210mm}%
+- %
+- \tolerance = 700
+- \hfuzz = 1pt
+- \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+- \defbodyindent = 5mm
+-}}
+-
+-% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
+-% From romildo at urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
+-% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
+-\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+- \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
+- \textleading = 12.5pt
+- %
+- \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
+- {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
+- {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
+- {210mm}{148mm}%
+- %
+- \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
+- \tolerance = 800
+- \hfuzz = 1.2pt
+- \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+- \defbodyindent = 2mm
+- \tableindent = 12mm
+-}}
+-
+-% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
+-\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
+- \afourpaper
+- \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
+- {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
+- {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+- {297mm}{210mm}%
+- %
+- % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
+- \globaldefs = 0
+-}}
+-
+-% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
+-\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
+- \afourpaper
+- \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
+- {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
+- {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+- {297mm}{210mm}%
+- \globaldefs = 0
+-}}
+-
+-% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
+-% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
+-% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
+-%
+-\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
+-\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
+- \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
+- \globaldefs = 1
+- %
+- \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+- \setleading{\textleading}%
+- %
+- \dimen0 = #1\relax
+- \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
+- %
+- \dimen2 = \hsize
+- \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
+- %
+- \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
+- {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
+- {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+- {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
+-}}
+-
+-% Set default to letter.
+-%
+-\letterpaper
+-
+-
+-\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
+-
+-% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
+-\catcode`\"=\other
+-\catcode`\~=\other
+-\catcode`\^=\other
+-\catcode`\_=\other
+-\catcode`\|=\other
+-\catcode`\<=\other
+-\catcode`\>=\other
+-\catcode`\+=\other
+-\catcode`\$=\other
+-\def\normaldoublequote{"}
+-\def\normaltilde{~}
+-\def\normalcaret{^}
+-\def\normalunderscore{_}
+-\def\normalverticalbar{|}
+-\def\normalless{<}
+-\def\normalgreater{>}
+-\def\normalplus{+}
+-\def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
+-
+-% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
+-% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
+-% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
+-%
+-% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
+-% otherwise. Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
+-% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
+-% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
+-%
+-\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+-
+-% Same as above, but check for italic font. Actually this also catches
+-% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
+-% italic fonts. But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
+-% this is not a problem.
+-\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+-
+-% Turn off all special characters except @
+-% (and those which the user can use as if they were ordinary).
+-% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
+-% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
+-
+-\catcode`\"=\active
+-\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
+-\let"=\activedoublequote
+-\catcode`\~=\active
+-\def~{{\tt\char126}}
+-\chardef\hat=`\^
+-\catcode`\^=\active
+-\def^{{\tt \hat}}
+-
+-\catcode`\_=\active
+-\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
+-\let\realunder=_
+-% Subroutine for the previous macro.
+-\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
+-
+-\catcode`\|=\active
+-\def|{{\tt\char124}}
+-\chardef \less=`\<
+-\catcode`\<=\active
+-\def<{{\tt \less}}
+-\chardef \gtr=`\>
+-\catcode`\>=\active
+-\def>{{\tt \gtr}}
+-\catcode`\+=\active
+-\def+{{\tt \char 43}}
+-\catcode`\$=\active
+-\def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
+-
+-% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
+-% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
+-% So turn them off again, and have \everyjob (or @setfilename) turn them on.
+-% \otherifyactive is called near the end of this file.
+-\def\otherifyactive{\catcode`+=\other \catcode`\_=\other}
+-
+-% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
+-% parsing them.
+-\def\turnoffactive{%
+- \normalturnoffactive
+- \otherbackslash
+-}
+-
+-\catcode`\@=0
+-
+-% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
+-% as in \char`\\.
+-\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
+-\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont % let existing .??s files work
+-
+-% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
+-% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
+-{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef at realbackslash{\} @gdef at doublebackslash{\\}}
+-
+-% In texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
+-% in fixed width font.
+-\catcode`\\=\active
+- at def@normalbackslash{{@tt at backslashcurfont}}
+-% On startup, @fixbackslash assigns:
+-% @let \ = @normalbackslash
+-
+-% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
+-% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
+-% catcode other.
+- at gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
+- at gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
+-
+-% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
+-% the literal character `\'.
+-%
+- at def@normalturnoffactive{%
+- @let\=@normalbackslash
+- @let"=@normaldoublequote
+- @let~=@normaltilde
+- @let^=@normalcaret
+- @let_=@normalunderscore
+- @let|=@normalverticalbar
+- @let<=@normalless
+- @let>=@normalgreater
+- @let+=@normalplus
+- @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
+- @unsepspaces
+-}
+-
+-% Make _ and + \other characters, temporarily.
+-% This is canceled by @fixbackslash.
+- at otherifyactive
+-
+-% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
+-% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
+-% a backslash.
+-%
+- at gdef@eatinput input texinfo{@fixbackslash}
+- at global@let\ = @eatinput
+-
+-% On the other hand, perhaps the file did not have a `\input texinfo'. Then
+-% the first `\' in the file would cause an error. This macro tries to fix
+-% that, assuming it is called before the first `\' could plausibly occur.
+-% Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
+-% file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
+-%
+- at gdef@fixbackslash{%
+- @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @normalbackslash @fi
+- @catcode`+=@active
+- @catcode`@_=@active
+-}
+-
+-% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
+- at escapechar = `@@
+-
+-% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
+- at catcode`@& = @other
+- at catcode`@# = @other
+- at catcode`@% = @other
+-
+-
+- at c Local variables:
+- at c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
+- at c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message"
+- at c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
+- at c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
+- at c time-stamp-end: "}"
+- at c End:
+-
+- at c vim:sw=2:
+-
+- at ignore
+- arch-tag: e1b36e32-c96e-4135-a41a-0b2efa2ea115
+- at end ignore
diff --git a/debian/patches/series b/debian/patches/series
index e4ec420..e1642c6 100644
--- a/debian/patches/series
+++ b/debian/patches/series
@@ -7,3 +7,5 @@ mkoctfile-mpi.diff
always-build-octave-jar.patch
hdf5-flags.patch
hdf5-mkoctfile.patch
+xbackslash-texinfo.patch
+dont-use-included-texinfo-texmfcnf.patch
diff --git a/debian/patches/xbackslash-texinfo.patch b/debian/patches/xbackslash-texinfo.patch
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bf0baf3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/debian/patches/xbackslash-texinfo.patch
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+Description: Fix backslash characters in docstrings
+ Use @xbackslashchar to produce backslashes in docstrings consistently and be
+ compatible with Texinfo 6.
+Origin: upstream, http://hg.savannah.gnu.org/hgweb/octave/rev/2ec049e50ed8
+Bug-Debian: https://bugs.debian.org/cgi-bin/bugreport.cgi?bug=790533
+Last-Update: 2015-07-18
+---
+This patch header follows DEP-3: http://dep.debian.net/deps/dep3/
+diff -r 3300cb76cccd -r 2ec049e50ed8 libinterp/corefcn/utils.cc
+--- a/libinterp/corefcn/utils.cc Tue Jul 07 19:09:35 2015 -0700
++++ b/libinterp/corefcn/utils.cc Thu Jul 09 21:44:09 2015 -0400
+@@ -1379,7 +1379,7 @@
+ \n\
+ Implementation Note: Strings are first converted to double values before the\n\
+ checks for valid indices are made. Unless a string contains the NULL\n\
+-character @nospell{\"\\0\"}, it will always be a valid index.\n\
++character @nospell{\"@xbackslashchar{}0\"}, it will always be a valid index.\n\
+ @end deftypefn")
+ {
+ octave_value retval;
+diff -r 3300cb76cccd -r 2ec049e50ed8 scripts/io/beep.m
+--- a/scripts/io/beep.m Tue Jul 07 19:09:35 2015 -0700
++++ b/scripts/io/beep.m Thu Jul 09 21:44:09 2015 -0400
+@@ -20,9 +20,9 @@
+ ## @deftypefn {Function File} {} beep ()
+ ## Produce a beep from the speaker (or visual bell).
+ ##
+-## This function sends the alarm character @qcode{"\a"} to the terminal.
+-## Depending on the user's configuration this may produce an audible beep,
+-## a visual bell, or nothing at all.
++## This function sends the alarm character @qcode{"@xbackslashchar{}a"} to
++## the terminal. Depending on the user's configuration this may produce an
++## audible beep, a visual bell, or nothing at all.
+ ## @seealso{puts, fputs, printf, fprintf}
+ ## @end deftypefn
+
--
Alioth's /home/groups/pkg-octave/bin/git-commit-notice on /srv/git.debian.org/git/pkg-octave/octave.git
More information about the Pkg-octave-commit
mailing list